JP6691303B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  Pachinko game machines.

  The most popular Pachinko game machines at present are called "special symbols" (or main game symbols) on the display of 7-segment etc. when the game ball enters the starting opening (start chucker). When the special symbol is variably displayed and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special game state in which the player has a higher profit than the normal game state (a large winning opening in a normally closed state) This is a type of machine (so-called “attacker”) that moves to a game that is opened under a predetermined condition} (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”). Here, in order to reduce the load of the display control of the special symbol that is directly connected to the profit of the player, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol", it is called a "decorative symbol" for production to enhance the interest of the game. The symbol to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol also has a predetermined mode (for example, in accordance with this). It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative pattern in a predetermined mode.

  Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate from other types, how ingenious and highly entertaining is the overall production including the variation mode of the above-mentioned symbols. The focus is on giving. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden, and instead a highly interesting moving image is displayed, One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method.

JP, 2014-014494, A JP, 2014-014576, A JP, 2014-039745, A JP, 2014-079281, A

  However, since such a rendering method has been widely used from the past, there is a problem that further improvement is required for the control method thereof in order to improve the interest.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes that are dependent upon determining the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
One of the switching display mode of switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode of switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. Cage,
When the final display mode of the first effect design is displayed, the final display mode of the first effect design is displayed in each of the plurality of first effect design rows, thereby It is configured to display a combination of final display modes,
When the final display mode of the second effect design is displayed, the final display mode of the second effect design is displayed in each of the plurality of second effect design rows, thereby It is configured to display a combination of final display modes,
The plurality of first effect design rows and the plurality of second effect design rows are the same number of design rows,
Even when the plurality of first effect symbols are variably displayed in a state of being aligned, the plurality of second effect symbols are variably displayed in a state of being incomplete,
When the operation means is operated during the variable display of the first effect design and the second effect design, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed.
When the volume adjustment screen is displayed by the operation of the operation means during the variable display of the first effect design and the second effect design, the first effect design and the volume adjustment screen may overlap. , The second production design and the volume adjustment screen are configured not to overlap ,
The first effect design is configured to have at least a first element and a second element,
The second production design does not have the second element, but is configured to have at least the first element,
The final display mode of the first effect design when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, and the first identification information or the second identification information is in the certain stop display mode. It is possible to display the final display mode of the first effect design after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display by a different mode,
The display mode of the second effect design immediately before the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect design displayed in the variable display before the variable display, The display mode of the second effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information, regardless of the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display, It is configured to display a certain type of prescribed display mode among a plurality of predetermined types of prescribed display modes and then switch to a different type of prescribed display mode from the certain type of prescribed display mode. /> It is a pachinko machine characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to improve the control method for the effect related to the decorative pattern.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart for determining a design stop symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a display mode image diagram of a decorative design on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram related to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a transparent effect execution image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol holding content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the notice effect / design stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the first main game notice effect / design stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the second main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a pending change image diagram in the specific notice effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the hold digestion transfer image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a change image diagram of a holding digestion transmission image on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is completed. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the time saving medium first packaging content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a time saving medium decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a right-hand hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to a display mode and a display position of a decorative symbol in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram related to the display area of the decorative pattern in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to a variable display period of a decorative symbol in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to a decorative design to be used in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram related to a stop display mode of decorative symbols in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of the display priority in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram related to priority in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram related to a change in the hold display in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram related to the deletion of the hold display in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operation diagram of the distribution member unit of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a decorative symbol display mode image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the hold change display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a hold occurrence display image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a hold digest display image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a holding passage route in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative symbol effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of prefetching display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a big hit stop symbol display image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an interrupt effect execution image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory driving control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of decorative symbol content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process B on the sub main controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during fluctuation standby in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a transition of updating the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the prefetch effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a relationship between the number of holdings and the probability that the first decorative symbol is in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game state and a final display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a relationship between a gaming state and a hitting warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying a pseudo continuous symbol in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that a pseudo-relational symbol is displayed during prefetch effect display and the probability that a pseudo-repetitive symbol is displayed during a change in trigger variation in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power-off (not RAM clear) and the decorative pattern after the power-off recovery in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a relationship between the power-off (RAM clear) and the decorative design after the power-off recovery in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a relationship between the reach voice and the probability that the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in the full rotation effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a variation mode of the decorative design for each stage in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the display content of the decorative pattern during the change in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing a display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when re-changing is executed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment to become a super reach effect. FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a developed symbol is displayed corresponding to the notice type in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment and becomes a super reach effect. FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition at the time of the super reach effect when different display modes of the same notice type are displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different look-ahead effects are performed and become super reach effects in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition in a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when different display modes of the same prefetching effect type are performed and a super reach effect is obtained. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when the same super reach effect is developed through different displays. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition at the time of developing a super reach effect via a button effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition at the time of the super reach effect in different effect stages in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-changing is executed in different effect stages in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the pseudo reach symbol and the specific symbol are displayed and the super reach effect is executed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the pseudo reach symbol and the specific symbol are displayed and the super reach effect is executed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing a transition of fluctuation speeds of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form for carrying out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only award in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In the configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker), the advance state is the easy winning state, and the withdrawal state is the non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, as random numbers, hard Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning / non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notifying the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. "Variable display stop time" is the time to hold the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. After the lapse of time, the fluctuation related to the remaining hold is started (the fluctuation start condition and the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition are satisfied). The "design pattern" is a display image of a so-called decorative pattern or a decorative pattern, and is typically a card-shaped image object on which numbers, symbols and the like are written. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the activated line in a combination in which the numbers and symbols are the same, it is notified that a big hit has occurred. Both the "first production design" and the "second production design" are "production designs", but each is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a big hit. Is equivalent to (for example, the "first effect design" can be "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit, and the "second effect design" can be "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit. But also). "Variation mode" is, for example, variation time (including variation time of special symbol, variation time of design symbol, variation time of ordinary symbol), scrolling of decorative symbol, decorative symbol on the spot. Rotating (these may be referred to as “switching display mode”) and the like are included. "Temporarily stopping (or temporarily stopping) the design symbol" is not synonymous with "temporarily stopping → re-changing" as one set and performing / not performing this one set. is there. "Re-fluctuation" means a situation such as "temporarily stop the production design → re-fluctuation", a situation such as "start of variation → provisionally stop the production design", "re-variation start → production design" It is a term that includes a situation such as "temporarily stop (temporary stop after the second time)", and a pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous production and a revival variation in the revival production (temporarily stop the production design with a lost design). After that, it is a term that indicates, for example, a winning symbol is displayed and then stopped. In addition, it is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically after that, the stop display is definitely set together with the stop display of a so-called special symbol) for notifying whether or not a big hit has occurred. In addition, the “design symbol” is based on the first element (for example, a number), and the second element (for example, color) and the third element (whether or not there is additional information such as a character or “SUPER”). It may be configured to be incidental. Further, when the effect mode is different, the "design for presentation" may be configured such that the first element is the same or the second element and / or the third element are different. Further, since the second element and / or the third element are different, the degree of expectation that the reach variation is a big hit, and the expectation that a big variation is caused by the design variation related to the look-ahead effect when a specific symbol combination is stopped when the look-ahead effect is executed The profit rate for the player such as the number of rounds at the time of a big hit and the game state after the end of the big hit may be different. Further, in the case of such a configuration, in the case of the probability variation game state, the time reduction game state, etc., the second element and / or the third element are compared to the player in the normal game state. May be configured to be an advantageous element for The “information display unit” is for displaying information including a notice effect and the like, and is, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, or the like, and each of these may be shown alone. However, a combination of a plurality of display media such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp (entire unit) may be shown. Further, the "effect display unit" is for displaying effects including a notice effect, and is, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, or the like, and each of these may be shown as a single unit. However, a combination of a plurality of display media such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp (entire unit) may be shown.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood to be modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa.

  Prior to a detailed description of the present invention, a brief configuration according to the present invention will be described.

  Of the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, two types of decorative designs, a first decorative design and a second decorative design, are provided, and the first decorative design is hidden or second decorated in a situation where it is difficult to see. A configuration for displaying a pattern (variable display) will be described in detail in this embodiment.

  Among the pachinko game machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), at the temporary stop timing in the middle row during execution of pseudo continuous variation, a special symbol and a specific number (number consisting only of numbers) are generated. The configuration modified so that the vehicle can be temporarily stopped will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the present embodiment).

  In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), at the temporary stop timing in the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the temporary stop timing becomes the latter half {or, the pseudo consecutive number within the fluctuation. A configuration in which the number of stop modes that can temporarily stop increases as the number of temporary stops in the middle row increases will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from the present embodiment).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and a transparent effect in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is visible is configured to be executable, and the transparent effect is being executed. The configuration in which the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is hidden is described in detail in (Modification 3 from the present embodiment).

  Among the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, the decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, and is configured to be able to execute the prefetching effect, the special symbol is the final variation of the prefetching effect (trigger hold) (Variation related to)) can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol, and can be stopped as a pseudo continuous symbol of pseudo continuous variation will be described in detail in the second embodiment.

  In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), when executing the hold change effect (effect in which the hold display mode changes) based on winning of the prefetch lottery, changes to a specific hold display mode The configuration modified so as to provide the notice effect that is executed only in the case of the above will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

  Among the pachinko game machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), the appearance rate of the special symbol by the variation of the first main game side and the variation of the second main game side (prefetch lottery winning rate and angel zone The configuration in which the transfer lottery winning ratio) is changed to be different will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from the second embodiment).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, in the time shortening game state, one variation time of the first decorative symbol can be a time value for multiple variation time of the second decorative symbol (or main gaming symbol). This configuration will be described in detail in (Third Embodiment).

  Various configurations applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention regarding the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol will be described in detail in (4th embodiment). explain.

  In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, a configuration in which a display corresponding to two holdings, a first holding display and a second holding display, is displayed on the effect display device (a modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment) ) Will be described in detail.

  Among the pachinko game machines according to the present invention, a parallel lottery can be executed, and a decorative design corresponding to a variation of the first main gaming design is a first decorative design, and a decorative design corresponding to a variation of the second main gaming design is a second. A configuration having two decorative patterns will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

  In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, a configuration in which the configuration related to the area where the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed is changed from the configuration of (fifth embodiment) (change from the fifth embodiment) This will be described in detail in Example 1).

  A configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(This embodiment)

  Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko game machines are mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the left and right of the upper portion of the game machine, and a sound effect according to the game state and the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information.

  Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win the second main game starting opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged to overlap each other, and the presence of the first main game starting opening A10 causes the second main The upper part of the game starting port B10 is closed. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 are the first main game start openings A10. And, it is configured to be guided to the second main game starting port B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically stacked, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port. A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 may be arranged separately. In such a case, a member for closing the upper part of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d may be provided. Further, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10, and thus the game area D30 The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) may be difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, but may be easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance ball information indicating the entrance when entering the ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 serves as a trigger for the lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided (however, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

  Next, on the upper right of the outlet D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) flows down. The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in a horizontal rectangular shape, which is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the jackpot symbol, It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the outlet D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d (and a first big winning). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult to win in the first special winning port C10 and an open state in which the game balls are easy to win (the first (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker) and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open rectangular shape when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and a second special winning prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker) and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and a missing "-" (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: low speed blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role so as not to display the first main game side decorative symbol (second main game side decorative symbol). In the case of doing, it may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later.

  Next, the effect display device SG executes display of effect images including decorative designs (first decorative design and second decorative design) that fluctuate / stop in conjunction with the first main game design / second main game design. It is a device that does. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a plurality of rows of decorative patterns (first decoration) that imitate a game of a slot machine. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of fluctuation. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding the auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that are not executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by flashing or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Production control means (sub-main control section) for performing display control and the like on the main display control board M for performing a control directly related to a person's profit) and the production display device SG for imparting amusement to game contents. SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with winning in each winning port, an upper ball plate D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of an upper ball plate D20. To area D30 A launching device D42 for launching balls one by one, a launch control board D40 for controlling the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea, etc., which is a switch, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) Sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control section SM and the sub sub control section SS are one board, which controls various performances, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, execution of error notification, etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S, various effects on the effect display device SG such as change / stop of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , A sub-main control unit SM for controlling error notification, and a display process such as a variable display / stop display, a hold display, and a notice display of a decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) on the effect display device SG. It is provided with two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. Here, although not particularly shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area in order to prevent a program etc. modified by an illegal act from being written. It is suitable (for example, the unused area is filled with 0s, the used area is written in a young address, and the like). In addition, in order to prevent you from referring to data that you do not normally refer to due to noise or fraudulent activity, you can use unused data (for example, data that is referred to by a game machine with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage). It is preferable to configure so as not to provide the data etc.). Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used by filling the young address and the unused program area is not provided. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {first main game starting entrance ball detection device A11s, second main game starting entrance ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, general winning opening is a winning opening that has a prize ball but does not perform symbol lottery ,), Drive solenoids (not shown) (the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown) and the like, which are indispensable for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM / sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production / game progress state, etc. can be sent to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information from an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board are arranged. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player, and receives a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, and the ball feeding device). Etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separately provided and adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

  Next, the sub-control board S, as described above, the effect display device SG for displaying the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design), the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effects. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub control board S has the sub main control section SM and the sub sub control section SS, and the sub main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first / second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) relating to the effect, the prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M, and is communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. ROM and RAM, and elements such as CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

  First, the main control board M, game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of information for the game, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, the progress of games such as special games and specific games. The game progressing means MP that controls the current and past game states [for example, a state related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), special game state}, auxiliary game state (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off state of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] The game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing, etc., and various game information on the game peripheral device side {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4 Big hit, loss}, information on variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and accumulated untransmitted commands) The command transmission buffer MT10) and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay a predetermined prize ball based on winning of game balls into various winning openings. There is.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like), and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entering each starting opening during variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. is doing. Further, the game progression means MP is a display control means MP10 for performing control for changing and stopping display of each symbol, and directly for determining whether to open or close the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. A second main game starting opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, there is a determination of which game state the current game state is to be transitioned to, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of transitioning the game state based on the determination. is doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the ball entry determining means MJ10 is a first main game starting opening entry determining means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game starting opening A10, and a second main game launching opening. A second main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game starting opening for determining whether or not a game ball has flown into the auxiliary game starting opening H10. To the first winning a prize mouth determining means MJ11-C10 and the second winning a prize mouth C20, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning a prize mouth C10 It has a second big winning opening ball entry determining means MJ11-C20, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main number) according to the determination result. Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the "random number" in the claims and the specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or "allocated by the type of random number (e.g., winning random number or variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing a value along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears (initial value). ) Is defined by a value having an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like. By obtaining a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult for a player to expect. On the contrary, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30, the hold digestion control means MJ31 for controlling the processing relating to the hold digestion and the fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number acquired in the situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission has not come down. It is determined whether to temporarily store, based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission comes down. -A, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in the situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been obtained, and the random number is given the symbol variation permission based on the determination result. Up to the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B to hold the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game acquired in a situation in which the auxiliary game symbol variation permission has not come down Whether or not to temporarily store the random number is determined, based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is given. And have.

  Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four random numbers, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. In order to temporarily store in the form, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively. Have

  Next, the game content determination means MN, and the winning / discarding lottery means MN10 that randomly selects whether or not to win the special game and whether or not to open the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d, and the winning / unwinning lottery results in the special game. Of the special game transition determining means MN20 which makes the transition determination (for example, the hit flag is internally turned on), the symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number And a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on the above. Here, the win / loss lottery means MN10 is a first main game win / win lottery means MN11-A for performing win / win lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game win / win lottery means for performing win / loss lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game win / loss lottery means MN11-H for performing win / loss lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / win lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win / loss lottery means MN11-H are referred to when the win / win lottery regarding the first main game symbol is performed. The first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A, and the second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when the win / win lottery regarding the second main game symbol is performed, and the win / loss lottery about the auxiliary game symbol Each has an auxiliary game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Here, when executing the winning / winning lottery based on the main game random number, the winning / winning lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any of all the hit random number values, or When a part or all of the random number values are continuous numerical values, it is determined whether or not the main game random number value is less than or equal to the upper limit value of the hit random number value and greater than or equal to the lower limit value, to thereby determine whether or not the random number is valid. . Accurate determination processing can be performed by performing such a hit / miss determination. On the contrary, in the case of executing the winning / disabling judgment by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or only the lower limit thereof, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023, 0 or Since it is necessary to set 1023) as a random number value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent act of passing a current through the main control board M, and all the bits of the storage area easily become 0 or 1). There is a risk of In this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery (if a plurality of random numbers are used in one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Must be prevented from synchronizing}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and acquisition Based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / non-winning result / game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal game state) (Lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / discarding result / game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery). (Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ according to the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and a second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number). It has auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result / game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal Gaming state lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result / game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game). State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling the stop display after changing the game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a zero-clearable first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is further provided with an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main gaming starting entrance electric auditors object B11d is satisfied. 2nd main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening and closing condition decision means MP21-B, and second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening timer MP22t which measures the drive (opening) time of the second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d -B and.

  Next, the special game control means MP30, the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transition condition is satisfied, the content of the special game (Specifically, a special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, a time between rounds, etc.) is determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second special winning opening C20 under predetermined conditions, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first special winning opening) C10 and the special game time management means MP34 for opening and closing the second special winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 is the first and second special winning opening electric prize opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric prize C11d and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table. Details are not shown).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50, the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variation game in which the probability of a lottery for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reducing game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time shortening. function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game without time limit) except for). That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The probability variation game end condition determining means MP51 and the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability at each symbol variation. It may have a function of performing (a so-called "pachinko game machine having a falling lottery function"). The time-saving game state according to this example may be that the main game time saving flag is on or the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, that is, the time saving game state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, and the non-time reduction game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not operating. The time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Further, the probability variation game state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation game state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB, the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop) First / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, ON / OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of hours saved, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the currently changing first or second main game symbol (first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is an auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (the auxiliary game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main controller SM is a decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) in a form that is time-synchronized with the variation of the first main game design and the second main game design. This is related to the display of only the information that does not affect the result of the game, including the variation of the (pattern). Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stop display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first / second main game common peripheral device C is in the closed state during the normal game, and is opened under the predetermined condition during the special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has a possible auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Next, the effect display control unit (sub-main control unit) SM, the display information receiving unit SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the determination process and the display control process of the effect content related to the effect display. It has effect display control means SM20 that controls the information display, and information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub controller SS side. The above means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing the symbol information and the display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the determination process and the display control process of the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), and the decorative symbol (the first symbol). (1 decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) holding number display control means SM22 for managing the number of pieces to be held and for holding display processing, background effect display control means SM23 for controlling background image determination processing and display control processing, and notice effect It has advance notice display control means SM24 that controls the content determination processing and display control processing, and reach production display control means SM25 that controls the reach production content determination processing and display control processing.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, and is a decorative symbol {in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol). The first decorative design and the second decorative design are independent of each other, and the game is performed by combining three numerical designs of the first decorative design or the second decorative design. It is possible to inform the result} of the stop symbol and the variation display content determining means SM21n for determining the variation mode, and various information (variation mode) related to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) Information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.) A temporary storage for displaying related information for temporarily storing SM21b, and a first for measuring the variation time of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) Thailand / Floating time management Has a SM21t-1, the. Here, the design drawing display content determination means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for design content variation content referred to when determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and the effect of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design), display update timing, decoration referred to when determining the display update content (or set) It further has a symbol effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independently display-controlled on the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM side based on the information from the main control board M side. By making good use of these two types of decorative patterns, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game. This point will be described later. To do.

  Next, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 has a drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to suspension of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design). .

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information on the background effect display and the background effect display content determining means SM23n that determines the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. And background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice content and the display timing of the notice effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the notice effect display information determining means SM24n. Has a preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, a sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and an image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. And a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control section SM side and information related to various image displays.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 is a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), and a first hold display section SG12 (and the first hold display unit SG12 for displaying main game hold information). 2 hold display section SG13).

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  From here, an example of a general process flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flow chart is mainly composed of processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (shown by rounded rectangles). . Also, in the case where the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the reference to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle whose left and right lines are double lines). . Here, at the game machine development stage, game machines with different specifications are also being developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine executed by the game machine with different specifications (in the processing on the main side, Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left, so that processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or cheating.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial setting (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control unit MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is present). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM). If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M stores various data stored in the RAM of the main control board M (backed up) at the time of power failure. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and the control command described later). It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M causes an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 10B is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  It should be noted that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured so as not to be a value at which the special game is executed (noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program Therefore, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game has been executed).

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later in step 1100, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms). Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric auditors product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes a later-described special game operating condition determination process. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc. based on the winning opening in which the game ball wins). The payout control board KH is caused to execute the processing, etc. for managing the result). Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was used. In the control command transmission process, the order of receiving commands on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M decides to transmit the commands (the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. To be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interruption), in step 1020, the main control board M sets information (for example, a checksum) when the power is cut off based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflowed or passed in the case of a gate) in the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether the holding balls are not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). To determine. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H holds a ball with the random number set in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with information on how many pieces are held. Is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric auditors opening flag is OFF. Or not. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball for the auxiliary game symbol. . If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). Along with the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time saving flag). When is ON, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is OFF) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H, based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C A predetermined time related to the variable time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball concerned with the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached. To do. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired assist. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit”. If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). A predetermined time relating to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game shortened flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game shortened flag is off. Seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric auditors opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B to determine the opening time of the electric auditors. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d, and the auxiliary gaming state is temporarily turned on. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the memory means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

  In addition, if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process proceeds to (processing of step 1300).

  Further, in the present flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately shifts to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A determines the first main game starting entrance entering information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main starting opening A10. Is received. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to (side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning / non-winning lottery random number for determining the win / fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting the information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (first main game hold occurrence command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. Even if No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process moves to step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B uses the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main starting mouth B10 to enter the second main starting entrance. Determine whether information has been received. If Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to (side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / discarding lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired, as in the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / unwinning random number for the first main game and the winning / unwinning random number for the second main game) The acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (second main game hold occurrence command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1400).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted, but the information of the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be added and transmitted, and it is also possible to substitute the information indicating that the random number has been acquired from these information.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing relating to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol does not exist. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and moves to the next process (process of step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to executing the second main game symbol holding digest, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on winning order or both main game symbols in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the holding digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variation start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

  If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the holding digestion control means MJ31, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) Temporarily stored, while reading the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game The symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information that is temporarily stored is shifted (holding digest processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / winning lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming winning / winning lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming winning / winning lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, 1 Main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, winning lottery random number) Based on the main game symbol win / win lottery.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) that cannot shift the game state is not illustrated, but a small hit may occur (small hit is won). Further, in such a configuration, for example, (1) the winning probability of the small hit is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, the first main game side is more than the second main game side Is also easy to win (the second main game side does not have to be provided with a small hit), (2) When a small hit is won, the game state after the end of the small hit is the same as the game state before the start of the small hit. It remains as it is (when the big hit is won, the game state after the big hit ends can be different from the game state before the big hit starts), (3) The big hit is the first main game side and the second main game side And the winning probability is the same, and the winning probability is high due to the probability variation game state, whereas the winning probability is different between the first main game side and the second main game side for small wins. The winning probability is not changed as a result of winning and changing to the probability variation game state. (4) As a stop design of the selected design variation decorative design, "special design" (for example, "2 ★ 2" or "3 ★ 9" such as ★ corresponds to "special design") that is dedicated when the small hit is stopped Get, (5) not a set of three identical symbols as a stop symbol of a decorative symbol of a symbol variation that is won in a small hit, and a specific result that is a combination of numbers having a certain regularity (for example, " 234 "or the like, or" 432 "or the like or the odd number such as" 357 "or the like may be stopped. (6) The same as the small hit (or similar) from the player's perspective. The big win (2R or more, which is an open mode (visibility) of the special winning opening, but the number of rounds is different, but when viewed from the player, it looks like the same open mode (the small win is only one round. The special winning opening is opened multiple times in one round, and the jackpot is opened the same number of times as the multiple times. (Execution in a plurality of rounds)} is provided (in such a case, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols which is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit), (8) In the second decorative symbol, the "special symbol" dedicated to the small hit does not stop (or may not stop), (9) The decorative symbol which is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit. Even in the configuration in which the combination is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether it is a small hit or a big hit varies depending on the type of the decorative pattern combination that the player cannot easily distinguish (for example, by aligning three, after the big hit ends. If the decorative symbol that is almost deterministic to transition to the probability variation game state is included in the stop symbol, the probability of being a big hit is higher than the case where it is not included).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game Referring to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), regarding the main game symbol based on the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined by referring to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) determines the first main game variation mode determining lottery corresponding to each game state. Referring to the table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 (main game table 3) are an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side, based on the winning / non-drawing result of the main game symbol, the main game time saving flag state and the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, A variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is configured to be determined. That is, when the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is likely to be determined, and when the main game time saving flag is ON (time saving game state), The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined, and the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 as compared with the case where the number of holdings is 0 to 1 Is configured so that it can be easily determined (only when losing). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. Also, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be a relatively long time {symbol variation on the second main game side. When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, the second main game side is likely to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. It is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be separated for the purpose of constructing a situation}. It should be noted that "Demonstration Mode Executed on Sub Side" shows an example of an effect executed when each variation mode is selected. As an effect mode executed on the sub side, a pseudo continuous fluctuation (an effect that seems to occur a plurality of symbol fluctuations during one fluctuation display of the main game symbol) to be described later is executed. It may be possible to provide a "pseudo continuous failure effect" that is an effect that informs the player that the pseudo continuous variation is not executed after instinctively telling the player whether or not it is the same, for example, at the time of loss. In the gaming state, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "pseudo continuous failure production → stop losing hits" is greater when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 than when the number of reservations is 2 to 3 May be configured (both non-time-reduced game state and time-reduced game state may be so configured), when the "pseudo continuous success effect" is executed, the pseudo continuous described later Tells the player whether or not the change is executed It may be configured to notify that the pseudo-continuous variation is performed after the Tsu. Further, the "pseudo continuous failure effect" and the "pseudo continuous success effect" are effects using a "special symbol" or a specific result described later, and for example, when the "pseudo continuous failure effect" is executed, " After inflicting on the player whether or not the "special design" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, the decorative design one frame after the "special design" is stopped in the middle row (temporary stop), and the "pseudo continuous success effect" is In the case of being executed, after the player is instructed whether or not the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, the "special symbol" is stopped in the middle row (temporarily stopped) in a production mode. There is. Also, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortening game state which is an irregular symbol change, the first main game symbol relating to the loss of the time shortening game state concerned The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured such that the variation mode for a short time is not selected regardless of the number of holdings (for example, the variation time is all 5 seconds or more). The number of holdings shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game holding and the second main game holding, but the first main in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A. It is the game holding number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, the second main game holding number.

  Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN, the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Information regarding the determined main game symbol such as variation mode information and a command regarding the current game state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C to change. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the next process (the process of step 1500) is performed.

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol fluctuation is finished (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). Stop the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and display the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C to determine whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1452, in step 1470 the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in a step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the hour / hour counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining hour / hour) is 0. If Yes in step 1474, in step 1476 and step 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then Process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1452, step 1470, or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 has a specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short time flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in a step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, at step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, at step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) indicating that the special game is started in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if Yes in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game is not permitted, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets an opening pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in a step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in a step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in a step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first special winning opening electric winning combination C11d (or the second special winning opening electric winning combination C21d) of the first special winning opening C10 to obtain the first big winning prize. The mouth C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (especially opening time timer), and the process is started, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the special winning opening is reached. It is determined whether or not it has passed. If Yes in step 1626, the process moves to step 1628. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1626, the process shifts to the next process (process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 determines the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, at step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in a step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, a round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) indicating that the special game is to be ended in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in a step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (a process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol (after the execution of the special game, the probability variation game state is set. It is a jackpot pattern to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probable variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that does not shift to the probability variation game state after the execution of the special game, in this example, 4A / 4B), step 1656 Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (100 times in this example), and proceeds to step 1658.

  Next, in step 1658 and step 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1997 processing).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26, the control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information When received → Initializing the RAM on the sub side, when receiving various information commands → Reset the production related information at the time of power interruption to the RAM on the sub side) Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of holdings (for example, the drawing holding counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). The effect etc. being executed is not restored and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM causes a hold information management process to be described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main controller) SM executes special game related display control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the background effect control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), The repeat processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 7C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM determines the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the input port of the data signal line). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command sent from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing is restored.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to a new suspension occurrence from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main symbol). It is determined whether or not (pending information related to the game symbol) is received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to store the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, "1" is added to the second main game (up to four). Next, in step 2106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22, based on the suspension occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, suspension information (especially, random number value and suspension prefetch group information related to main game symbol lottery). ) Is temporarily stored in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 deletes the suspension information related to the symbol variation (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. , Shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the design drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content decision permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Even if No in step 2111, the process proceeds to step 2118.

  Next, in step 2118, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12 and the second hold display section SG13). The same number of holding images as the drawing holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n), the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). With reference to the stop pattern / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) It is a so-called decorative design that is controlled, and details of its display size and operation contents will be described later) (for example, when the stop design related to the main game design is a jackpot design, “7. Numbers such as "7" (hit numbers), in the case of a lost design, number variations such as "1.3.5" and variations (for example, variations related to the main game symbol) If it is a short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if it is a long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined}, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means). It is temporarily stored in the SM 24b and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and an effective line (a line that can notify the result of winning or losing by arranging three numeral symbols). ) Is one line, which means a big hit if the same numerical symbols are aligned on the relevant active line (inversely, if the same numerical symbols are not aligned on the relevant active line, it will be lost). In addition, in the left column, middle column, right column (or only in the middle column), "special symbol" other than the numerical symbol (when displayed on the relevant line, it does not mean a big hit, but after that, a big hit. It is a design that gives notice that there is a possibility that the display size and details of the operation will be described later), but it can be stopped (temporary stop), and the numerical design can also be provisionally stopped while the design is changing. Has been done. The temporary stop means that the decorative symbols in all the columns are temporarily stopped and displayed during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed. , A state in which variable display can be started again during the period (hereinafter, used in the same meaning). In addition, as will be described later in detail, the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), and not fixedly stopped, and is not included in the stop mode for notifying a big hit. It is configured, "special symbol" at the time of pre-reading effect execution, can be provisionally stopped (provisional stop), can be fixed stop, and is configured not to be included in the stop mode to notify the big hit .

  Next, in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n), the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b ( With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the second decorative symbol (as described above, display control based on the information from the main control board M side) It is a so-called decorative design, and the stop size of its display size and operation details will be described later) (for example, when the stop design related to the main game design is a big hit design, “7,7,7”). ”, Etc., such as numbers (hit numbers), in the case of lost designs, numbers such as“ 1, 3, 5, ”etc., and variations (eg, variations related to the main game design) Is a non-reach when it is a short-term fluctuation, and normal reach or super-reach when it is a long-term fluctuation}, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b) is determined. , Temporarily stored in the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is composed of three columns of a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and an effective line (a line in which it is effective to arrange the same numerical symbols) is one line. That is, if the same numerical symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (inversely, if the same numerical symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is lost). Moreover, only the numerical symbols can be stopped in the left column, the middle column, and the right column (the "special symbol" does not stop like the first decorative symbol), and is configured not to be temporarily stopped during the symbol change. .. In this way, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to independently determine the display content for notifying the winning / losing of the main game symbol, that is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The decorative pattern has a property that both sides can independently notify the result of winning or losing relating to the main game pattern as its basic property.

  Next, in step 2216, the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n determines whether or not the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b and whether or not the result is a decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern). Based on the variation mode, the decorative symbol effect content is determined by referring to the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative symbol effect table 1 to the decorative symbol effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the variation of the design symbol, The display update timing and the display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) is performed. Transition. Even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

  In the above description, the main game symbol whose display is controlled on the main control board M side is the first main game side (the first main game symbol) or the second main game side ( It is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), but basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Good, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in association with the second main gaming symbol, that is, the variable display of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. Regardless of which variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be set to be executable in conjunction with it. However, in the time shortening game state (a state with a so-called electric power support state), this is not the case, and for example, in the time shortening game state, a variation display of the first main game symbol and a variation of the second main game symbol It is possible to exemplify that any one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed in a variable state in association with whichever one of the displays is performed.

  Here, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (decorative symbol effect table 1, decorative symbol effect table 2) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 1, particularly, in the case where the hit / miss result is lost, And, it is an example of a decorative symbol effect table 2, particularly a part of the case where the hit result is a big hit). In the drawings, the first decorative design may be simply described as a first mounting diagram and the second decorative design may be described as a second mounting design (the same applies hereinafter). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the result of winning or rejecting the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column, in this example, "miss" or "big hit") and decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) And the variation mode of the second decorative pattern (in the second column on the left side), in this example, only in the case of "pseudo continuous failure (total production time 30 seconds)" "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)" Example) and the acquired random number value (a random number value acquired on the sub-main board SM side, and a part of the random number value is shown in the third column on the left), based on the decorative pattern effect contents (fourth column on the left) In the present example, "main effect A-1 (miss) pseudo rendition 1" and "main effect B-1 (big hit) pseudo rendition" and the like) can be determined. When the decorative symbol effect content is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, in the case where the decorative symbol effect content = “A-1 (miss) pseudo run 1”, “display update timing” = “change start time (after 0 seconds)”, “display update content” = “appearance” Figure fluctuation start (all rows of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) "is determined, and" display update timing "=" 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation "" display update content "=" first temporary suspension drawing display " (Left column), the second packaging is not displayed ”. Then, as will be described later, the “display update content” that has reached the “display update timing” is the first decorative pattern according to the elapsed time related to the change time of the decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern). It will be sequentially executed for each of the second decorative pattern. That is, when “A-1 (miss) pseudo-relation 1” is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbol and all columns of the second decorative symbol are variably displayed, “display update timing” = “variation start” By 12 seconds later, when the display control is performed so that all columns are hidden (the variable display is not displayed) for the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. , Display control is performed so that all columns are variably displayed (the manner in which variability is displayed is visible), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative pattern As for the display control so that only the left column is stopped, the display control is performed so that all the columns are hidden (the variable display is not displayed) for the second decorative symbol. . Thus, the basic operation in the illustration of the present example, when the first decorative symbol is visible to the player (easy to recognize), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. While the first decorative design is invisible (difficult to see) while the first decorative design is invisible to the player (difficult to view), the second decorative design is visible to the player ( In order to ensure that the player is informed, that is, to notify the player that the symbol is changing, the second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed complementarily. In addition, the effect pattern (series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (miss) pseudo-relation 1" is different from the effect pattern defined by the name of other decorative pattern effect contents (that is, the display contents are different). ) It is a supplementary note. In addition, the range of random number values is "0-1023" in all the variation modes, and this figure excerpts a part of the random number range in the diagram variation mode (henceforth, corresponds to a certain diagram variation mode). Although the random number range of the obtained random number value and the random number range of the obtained random number value corresponding to the design variation mode different from the certain diagram variation mode are different from each other, they are both “0 to 1023”. Range).

  Here, in the present embodiment, so-called pseudo continuous variation is configured to be executable, and specifically, the decorative symbol effect contents “A-1 (miss) pseudo rendition 1”, “A-2” in this example. (Loss) pseudo run 2 "," B-2 (big hit) pseudo run 2 ". For example, in the decorative design effect content "A-2 (miss) pseudo-ren 2", "display update timing" = "at the start of change (after 0 seconds)", "display update content" = "starting change of the drawing (No. 1 display pattern and all columns of the second decoration pattern) "is executed, then" display update timing "=" 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation "," 13 seconds after the start of fluctuation ", and" 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation " Display update content ”=“ first packaging temporary stop display (left column) ”(first decoration symbol left column is stop display),“ first packaging temporary suspension display (right column) ”(first decoration symbol The right column is a stop display), and the "first packaging special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle column of the first decorative symbol is a stop display at the "special symbol" described above) is sequentially executed. Then, after that, "display update timing" = "after 15 seconds from the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "starting fluctuation of the first packaging (all rows)" (only the first decorative symbol is displayed again in all rows) After the execution, "display update timing" = "26 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "28 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first provisional figure temporary stop display ( (Left column) "(the left column of the first decorative symbol is a stop display)," the first temporary design temporary stop display (right column) "(the right column of the first decorative symbol is a stop display)," the first decorative symbol special symbol " "Temporary stop display" (the middle display of the first decorative symbol is a stop display at the "special symbol" described above) is sequentially executed, so that for the player, during one variable display of the main game symbol, About 1 decorative design, it seems that the design change occurs more than once. And how the dynamic is being performed, how the "special symbols" are stopped and displayed, see an image view of FIG. 40).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the first decorative symbol is not displayed (a state in which the state of stop display / variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the above-mentioned “special symbol”. The second decorative pattern is variably displayed when it is temporarily stopped, and in other cases, the second decorative pattern is hidden. That is, if the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or if it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol). Only display, because there is no problem in the progress of the game), if the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or if it is impossible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol (for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle column (or all columns) cannot be determined}, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, so that the player is always in either The decorative design (either the first decorative design or the second decorative design) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game is easily grasped. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not stop temporarily, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative symbol, but is entertaining to the production. Since the main purpose is to increase, the second decorative symbol that is provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily grasped is a "special symbol" (that is, if it is displayed on the activated line, a big hit. This is because, although it does not mean, it is configured not to display symbols that may make it difficult to grasp the progress status of the game, such as symbols that give notice that a big hit may occur thereafter. In the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), a state in which the image is variably displayed at high speed (a variation state in which an afterimage is visible) may be included. In the case of the "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the state in which the variable display is displayed at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that changes from top to bottom, slowly from the top And (temporary) variable state toward the scheduled stop position) may be included.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured so as not to be temporarily stopped during the change (also, so that the "special symbol" does not stop), but is not limited to this, the second decorative pattern is also Similar to the first decorative pattern, it may be configured to be temporarily stopped during the change (also, pseudo change may occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all rows of the first decorative symbol and all rows of the second decorative symbol have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is performed. Different types of symbols will be configured.

  Further, with respect to the second decorative symbol, it is not necessary to always display it during the variable display of the main game symbol, and the display condition and display mode of the second decorative symbol may be appropriately changed. For example, (1) during the generation of a specific effect (instead of making the first decorative symbol invisible, it is an effect of reproducing the movie moving image using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or so-called effect. A movable decorative object for use can be brought into a state in which the display area on the effect display device SG is covered), and a second decorative design is displayed, (2) At a specific reach effect (second time) 1 Instead of making the decorative pattern invisible, when the reach effect in which the jackpot expectation is significantly increased is executed, for example, the display content of the effect performed on the effect display device SG is forcibly stopped. However, the second decorative pattern is displayed only when the so-called freeze reach effect is executed, and the second decorative pattern is hidden in the other reach effects (especially, when the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed). ) The appearance position of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG is made different according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-described effect movable accessory moves to a state of covering the display area on the effect display device SG). In the case of an effect, the effect is moved to a display area on the effect display device SG that is not covered by the movable accessory), and (4) the first decorative pattern can be moved / reduced / enlarged. On the other hand, with respect to the second decorative design, movement / reduction / enlargement display cannot be executed, or the probability of movement / reduction / enlargement display being executed, movement width, reduction ratio, enlargement ratio, etc. are greater than those of the first decoration design. May be lower, or the like.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the temporary image display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first package variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the first decoration based on the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the variation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ), And then proceeds to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2314, at step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has the variation mode temporarily stored in the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative symbol is reached. If Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the "special symbol" described above ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to be temporarily stopped only in the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is in the flag area of the temporary drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the angel zone flag (for notifying that the jackpot expectation will be increased. The flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324. On the other hand, if No in step 2320, the process moves to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the first decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 2330. In addition, in the present embodiment, the angel zone flag is turned on to display the “angel zone background” as the background effect. However, as the timing when the angel zone flag is turned on, for example, , (1) during the symbol fluctuations with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, symbol fluctuations that reach), (2) when the symbol fluctuations related to the hold of the digestive schedule before the symbol fluctuations with a high jackpot expectation are stopped, Etc. Also, as will be described later in detail, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to be turned on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or in the case of (2) described above. It may be decided to stop.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) causes the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (And the variation mode temporarily stored in the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2326, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative symbol is normally displayed (as described above, the player visually recognizes the first decorative symbol). It is a case where it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has the second symbol display flag (with respect to the second decorative symbol as a non-display state regarding the second decorative symbol) in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag for switching between ON = OFF and display state = ON) is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

  Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, main side information temporary storage means). Referring to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (fixed display command) of the first decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Sent to). Next, in step 2340, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the first package variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2350). To do. Even if No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

  In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM manages the timing related to the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the execution timing of the background effect by using the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1. Although configured, the management method such as the timing related to the change of the first decorative symbol and the execution timing of the background effect is not limited to this, and the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200. Timing, notice image / reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received content. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any timing (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first symbol varying flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. . If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display execution command of the second decorative symbol (command for variably displaying the second decorative symbol) (send display command in step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the control processing), and the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display erasing command of the second decorative symbol (command for hiding the second decorative symbol) (step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control processing), and the process proceeds to step 2360.

  Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, main side information temporary storage means). Referring to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). If Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the second decorative symbol (the sub-sub-control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Sent to). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and goes to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative symbol display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold display (the hold for the first main game symbol and the hold for the second main game symbol may be displayed at the same time) are effect display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, in the present embodiment, in the progress of the game, such as the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the fixed display timing (timing at which the main game symbol is stopped and displayed), Since the first decorative design is the main decorative design, the first decorative design has higher visibility than the second decorative design (the displayed area is supposedly large). Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing (fixed display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command is received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. Big hit start display is performed on the SG (display is made appropriately based on the type of big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (for game play and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.).

  Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying an effect related to the special game being executed, based on the game state at the time of winning of the big hit being executed and the big hit symbols being stopped ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999) (for example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, it is possible to shift to the probability variation game state after the special game ends. The production is performed so that the player cannot recognize it). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2500). . Even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “angel zone background” (background effect that can be displayed upon temporary stop of “special symbol”) as background effect, and in step 2506. Move to. Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the variation (part of the pseudo continuous variation) that triggered the transition to the “Angel Zone” has ended. To determine. If Yes in step 2506, in step 2508 the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the “angel zone background” was set), and proceeds to step 2520. To do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command is received from the main side. . If Yes in step 2512, in step 2514 a stage transition lottery for winning with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (the stage transition lottery will be executed at the start of variation of each variation). . Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage shift lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 shifts to a predetermined stage shift pattern (for example, the flat stage stage → the space stage → the volcano stage → the flat stage stage in order to loop each stage. Based on), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. In addition, in the case of No in step 2506, step 2512, or step 2516, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, to the sub-sub-control section SS side. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative designs, the first decorative design and the second decorative design, are provided, and the first decorative design is hidden (stopped). Display / variable display is not displayed), or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, by configuring to display the second decorative design (variable display), the player always displays one of the decorative designs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether or not a stopped symbol or a jackpot symbol is stopped.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the temporary stop symbol in the middle row is always the "special symbol", and during the variation display of the first decorative symbol, it is always the first symbol. Although the two decorative patterns are configured to be hidden, the display control method of the decorative patterns is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification 1 of the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 (decorative design effect table 3, decorative design effect table 4) are a decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative effect effect table 3, in particular, a part of the case where the hit / miss result is lost, and , A decorative symbol effect table 4, and in particular, a part of the case where the hit / miss result is a big hit). The changes from the present embodiment will first be described in detail with respect to the first decorative pattern. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be displayed even during the change. In addition, for example, when executing a pseudo continuous variation such as "A-6 (miss) pseudo run 2 (specific result)", at a temporary stop timing of the middle symbol, a specific result other than the "special symbol" is stopped. It is configured to do. Here, unlike the "special pattern", the specific result is that all columns (left column, middle column, right column) are stopped by numbers, but they are stop patterns that follow a certain rule. (For example, the order is “345” or the like), and is configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is being executed when the specific result is stopped. Further, in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, in the case of a loss, the specific result is more likely to be stopped than the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing in the middle row. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific result, that is, the "special symbol" is more than when the specific result is stopped. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is higher when is stopped. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific result is stopped than when the "special symbol" is stopped. Further, when the pseudo variation is executed in the pseudo continuous variation, all the symbols are re-varied, that is, the three symbols are re-varied after the three symbols are temporarily stopped. In such a case, , "Special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, and then, when the middle row is changed again, the decorative pattern in the middle row at the start of the re-variation is not the "special pattern" {for example, "6 ★ 7" "(★ = special symbol), if it is temporarily stopped, it changes again in the state of" 667 "(the middle symbol is preferably the symbol of the right symbol or the left symbol" ± 1 "piece)} It may be configured as follows.

  Next, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail regarding the second decorative design. In the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be always displayed during the change of the main game symbol. Further, in the case of reach, even at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is also temporarily stopped at the same time, and at the final display timing of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is also confirmed and displayed at the same time. (The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). Note that the variable display mode of the second decorative symbol is not limited to this, and for example, the first decorative symbol can be visually recognized, and the player can easily understand the game progress status by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. In the case of, the second decorative design is hidden, that is, during the variable display of the first decorative design, the left row and the right column are temporarily stopped, and the specific appearance is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. When it is in the middle, the second decorative symbol is hidden, while when the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the second decorative symbol is displayed variably (or temporarily). It may be configured such that it is a stop display). Further, in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped. Further, the second decorative design may be constantly displayed regardless of the changing status of the first decorative design, and the second decorative design may also be fixedly stopped only when the first decorative design is fixedly stopped.

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the specific outcome can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, so that the pseudo continuous variation can be achieved. A plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop at the time of execution can be provided, and the player can pay attention to which stop mode is by making the expectation degree of a big hit different depending on the stop mode. Therefore, the interest of the game will be enhanced.

  In addition, in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be variably displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of a specific effect such as a reach effect, the first decorative pattern is performed. May not be variably displayed (hidden), or only a specific column (for example, middle column) may be hidden.

  In addition, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the specific result (or "special symbol") is configured to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, but the specific result (or "special symbol") ) May be changed in the left column and the right column. For example, (1) the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is ± 1 of the same number. Number (for example, "4/5/4" or "special symbol" is arranged at position 5 in the middle row)), (2) In the same stop mode as the lost eye that is not a specific hit However, it is notified by a change in sound or color that it is a specific result, (3) Temporary stop at all columns simultaneously, (4) At the temporary stop timing of the left column and / or right column in the middle column Changed, (5) If the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are numbers that are more than “2” apart, the decorative pattern in the middle column is left And / or right columns and the case was temporarily stopped at a loss in the "2" or more away from the numbers, it may be used as such. In addition, the appearance condition of the specific appearance may be changed, and for example, it easily appears when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appears only when they are the same). As such, it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, when the "special design" (or specific result) appears after the reach, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the "special design" (or specific result) appears when the reach is not reached, or, There is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will be temporarily stopped again during the symbol fluctuation (for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher jackpot expectation than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol), Alternatively, there is a high possibility that temporary stop will be made again}.

(Modification 2 from the present embodiment)
Here, although the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative pattern at the time of pseudo continuous variation is given in the present embodiment and the modification example 1 from the present embodiment, of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous variation other than the configuration. With the configuration of the display mode, it is possible to create new playability. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the first modification from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 (decorative design effect table 5, decorative design effect table 6) are a decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative design effect table 5, in particular, a part of the case where the hit / miss result is lost, and , A decorative symbol effect table 6, and in particular, a part of the case where the hit / miss result is a big hit). The changes from the first modification from the present embodiment will first be described in detail with respect to the first decorative design. In the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is displayed during the change, and the "special symbol" that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation is "special symbol A" and "special symbol A". There are two types of special symbols "B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped from the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation (after that timing), while the "special symbol B" is the pseudo continuous. It is configured so that the temporary stop can be performed from the second temporary stop timing in the middle row in the fluctuation. In addition, the specific result is configured to be temporarily stopped from the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation (and after that timing). That is, at the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, as the stop mode, two kinds of "special symbol A" and the specific appearance can be temporarily stopped, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. At the temporary stop timing of, as the stop mode, three types of "special symbol A", "special symbol B" and specific appearance can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation is configured. The number of types of stopping modes that can be stopped is larger at the second temporary stop timing in the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. As described above, in the temporary stop timing in the middle row of the pseudo continuous variation, the kinds of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the second half is increased, or the kinds of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the second half is increased. May be reduced. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the types of stop modes increase as the provisional stop timing in the latter half increases, a stop mode with a high degree of expectation that the change will be a big hit as the type of selection candidate each time a pseudo change is executed It may be configured to be newly added, and by such a configuration, the player pays attention each time the pseudo variation is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing in the latter half of the period decreases, a stop mode with a low expectation that the change will be a big hit as a type of selection candidate each time a pseudo-variation is executed It may be configured to be deleted, and with such a configuration, it is possible to secure the degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a big hit each time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. The second decorative design has the same configuration as that of the first modification from the present embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the temporary stop timing in the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing becomes the latter half. By configuring so that the number of stop modes is increased, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row is temporarily stopped and the stop mode at the time of temporary stop, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Modification 3 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, as the decorative design, two types of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are provided, and the first decorative design is not displayed (stopped display / variable display is not displayed). State), or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the second decorative design is displayed (variable display), but the configuration using the second decorative design is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification 3 of this embodiment, and only the modifications from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 2232 (Mod 3) to Step 2236 (Mod 3), Step 2900 (Mod 3), Step 2246 (Mod 3) and Step 2248 (Mod 3), that is, Step 2204. Then, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (variant 3), the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the current game state is the probability variation game state. Or not. If Yes in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2234 (variant 3), the packaging display content determination means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to the probability variation display mode (during probability variation game state). The display pattern of the decorative pattern to be displayed in (1) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2236 (variant 3), the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to the uncertain variation display mode ( The display pattern of the decorative pattern to be displayed during the non-probability variation game state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to be different depending on whether or not it is the probability variation game state, and the first decorative symbol. When the display mode of the symbol changes (for example, when the non-stochastic variation game state shifts to the probability variation game state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also changed along with the change. In addition, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration that is different only depending on whether or not the probability variation game state, for example, whether or not the time reduction game state, the background It may be configured to be different depending on which production (production stage) is and the like.

  Next, in step 2900 (variant 3), the design drawing display content determination means SM21n executes a design stop symbol determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (variant 3), the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (variant 3), the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the design stop symbol determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variant 3) in FIG. 31 in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the number of rounds executed in the special game related to the big hit symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether it is 16R). If Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the packaging display content determination means SM21n arranges the three stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as “white” symbols (for example, “777”) and Decide on one of the three "black" designs (eg, "444") (three "white" designs will be selected Total distribution ratio and three "black" designs) Is 1: 1 with the total distribution ratio that is selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the packaging display content determination means SM21n arranges three stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of "black" symbol (for example, "444"). One of the above is determined and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. Thus, in the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) in the case of a special game. It can be stopped only, that is, when the three white symbols are stopped, the special game of the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) is configured to be almost deterministic. (It may be a relatively high profit for the player than a set of three "black" symbols).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2902, in step 2910 the packaging display content determination means SM1n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2912, the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n sets the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol to a predetermined missing symbol (in this example, "345", and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is only one pattern). Is set), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. The type of the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol does not have to be only one pattern, but it is desirable that it is smaller than the type of the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. In addition, the stop design at the time of losing the second decorative design is a predetermined loss design (in this example, "345"), whereas the stop design at the time of losing the first decorative design is selected from a plurality of candidates. Since (for example, it is randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), the frequency at which the predetermined loss symbol stops at the time of loss is higher in the second decorative symbol than in the first decorative symbol ( As a stop design of the first decorative design, a predetermined lost design may not stop). Further, in all the lost symbols (for example, only one pattern of "375") of the second decorative symbol which can be stopped, when three identical symbols are prepared, it is the highest for the player in any gaming state. It may be configured such that one or more symbols (eg, “7” symbols) that are profitable are always included (eg, “375” and “276” may be stopped).

  Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to a display mode of a decorative design in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different depending on whether the game state is the non-probability variation game state or the probability variation game state. The display modes (in this example, display colors and display attributes such as a color arrangement pattern, shape, size, etc.) are configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variation game state, only the "7" symbol is displayed as "white" with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all the symbols other than "7" are " While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (becomes a non-probable variation display mode), in the probability variation game state, "3" symbol and "7" together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol The symbols are displayed in "white", and the symbols other than "3" and "7" are all displayed in "black". That is, along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode may be different depending on the game state (it becomes the probability variation display mode). The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether or not it is the probability variation game state, and may be whether or not it is the time shortening game state, and it differs depending on which background effect (effect stage) is being executed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, in the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether or not it is the probability variation game state is the “3” symbol, but the “3” symbol is the above-mentioned symbol. It is included in the combination of the predetermined lost symbols (in this example, "345") that the second decorative symbol will stop when lost (in the left column, it becomes the stopped symbol), and in the non-stochastic variation game state. , While the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol at the time of losing are all displayed in "black", in the probability variation game state, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol at the time of losing is "white" from the left column. , "Black", and "black".

  Next, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (decorative symbol effect table 7, decorative symbol effect table 8) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 7, in particular, a part of the case where the hit / miss result is lost, And, it is an example of the decorative symbol effect table 8, particularly, a part of the case where the hit result is a big hit). The change from the present embodiment is that the item of the decorative pattern type is the display update type, and three items of “first decorative pattern”, “second decorative pattern” and “transmissive liquid crystal” are provided. In the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the transparent effect in which the J display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent is configured to be executable, and the first decoration is performed during the period in which the transparent effect is executed. Although the design is hidden, the second decorative design is displayed (see "33 seconds" of display update timing).

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3), that is, when the notice image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326, step 2327- 1 (variation 3), the notice effect display control means SM24, based on the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the change mode temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the transparent effect (effect). It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect that the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. In the case of Yes in step 2327-1 (variant 3), in step 2327-2 (variant 3), the notice effect display control means SM24 sets the image display command relating to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variant 3), the process moves to step 2328. In addition, when the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. Is erased (is not displayed), and the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed by the second decorative symbol display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the number-of-holds display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG (to the right as seen from the player). With this configuration, the player can visually check the number of holdings even during the execution of the transparent effect.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2410 (variant 3), that is, after setting the command related to the big hit display in step 2408 or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 ( In strange 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to continuously display the second decorative symbol from the stop of the big hit symbol relating to the special game (for example, "777" continues to be stopped) (step). In the display command transmission control processing of 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Thus, in the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed even during the execution of the special game, and the player can select which decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It is possible to determine whether the special game is being executed even during the special game is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and conceptual top view of the effect display device, the second decorative symbol display device is provided on the back side (seen by the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), whereby the second decorative symbol and the number-of-holding display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Moreover, although the effect can be displayed in the display area SG10 by outputting light from the light source, the effect is not displayed in the area of the display area SG10 adjacent to the second decorative symbol display device, The display of the second decorative symbol and the number of reserved display areas by the two decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG is visible. Incidentally, since the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is being executed even during the execution of the transparent effect, it is visible to the player. With such a configuration, even in the situation where the transparent effect is being executed, the player can recognize the changing state of the decorative symbol and the number of holdings by visually confirming the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device. Become. The display of the number of holdings may be different from the type of holding to be displayed depending on the game state (for example, the first main game holding number is displayed in the non-time shortening game state, and in the time shortening game state, The second main game hold number is displayed), the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number may be always displayed, or the total of the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number. It may be configured to display the number of reservations of. The configuration for displaying the effect in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display area SG10 is configured to be switched between the transparent state and the non-transparent state. For example, the position of the light source is changed. (For example, to output light obliquely from the rear of the display area), a light guide plate (a transmissive plate-like member that vertically scatters the light emitted from the light emitting element and incident from the side surface) may be used. It may be a display area (so-called edge light type) for performing display via a display area, a display area made of organic EL, or the like. As a configuration example using the light guide plate, when viewed from the player side, "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)", "light guide plate {located close to the transmissive liquid crystal (about 5 mm), A light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the light source plate} "," Light source B that constantly outputs light to the lower left of the display area SG10 "," feature "," role " When a transparent effect is executed by arranging in order of "light source C for emphasizing and showing the object to the player" (when wanting to emphasize the character and showing it to the player), the output of the light source A is turned off (light source). The output of A may be reduced compared to when the transparent effect is not executed), the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned on, and the transparent effect is not executed (I do not want to show the character to the player, and When the player wants to show the effect in the display area SG10), the light source A and ON the output of the source B, and outputs the OFF of the light source C (output of the light source C also may as an output lower than the transmissive demonstration execution) may be configured to. Further, the display of the second decorative symbol and the number of reserved display areas is not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, by the second decorative symbol display device emitting light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10). In the display area SG10, the second decorative symbol and the number of reserved display areas can be displayed by a mechanism similar to the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by the light output from the light source toward the display area SG10, that is, , By the second decorative symbol display device instead of the light source, even if the light source does not output light due to the transmission effect, the second decorative symbol display device always outputs light, 2 The decorative pattern and the display of the number of reserved display areas may be configured to be always visible (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of the transmissive liquid crystal).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a transparent effect execution image diagram in the third modification from the present embodiment. In this example, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), pseudo continuous variation will be executed twice (variation of pseudo continuous 2), one symbol variation is executed. The case is illustrated. First, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) is started, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of certain decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) is started again, the display area SG10 is in the transparent state due to the execution of the transparent effect, and the back of the display area SG10 (game) The player is able to visually recognize the state in which the accessory in (as seen from the player) is being driven. After that, the transparent effect ends (the display area SG10 becomes the non-transparent state), the accessory in the back of the display area SG10 (as seen by the player) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed again. It becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of losing, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at the missing pattern {the second decorative pattern stops at a predetermined missing pattern ("345"), and the first decorative pattern It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the lost symbol (“787”)}. In the case of a big hit, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at the big hit pattern {the big hit pattern of the first decorative pattern and the big hit pattern of the second decorative pattern are the same combination of stop symbols. Have become}. After that, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed in the same big hit pattern as at the start of the special game. It should be noted that, even during the execution of the special game, the transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be in the transparent state), and for example, an effect of notifying whether or not the probability variation game state is reached after the end of the special game. By configuring so that the transparent effect can be executed immediately before the execution, the player can increase the expectation of shifting to the probability variation game state after the special game ends by visually recognizing the transparent effect. Even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-holding display area is maintained (because it is visible), so that the progress of the game is not hindered. Is configured. As a display example of the decorative pattern during the special game, for example, during the special game, in order to notify the player of which three decorative patterns have become a big hit, only one of the arranged symbols is displayed. (For example, when a big hit is reached with “777”, “7” is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the aligned symbols are provided to the player. In order to make it recognizable, the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-holds display area may be maintained even during the special game.

  With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 3 of the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in the transparent state, and the accessory in the effect display device SG is visible. The effect is configured to be executable, and since the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is being executed even if the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the transparent effect, the player is given the second decorative symbol. By visually confirming the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the variation status of the decorative pattern and the number of holdings, and it is possible to make the gaming machine more user-friendly. In addition, a game state transition distribution ratio after the special game related to entry into the first main game start port A10 and a game state transition distribution after completion of the special game related to entry into the second main game start port B10. With different rates, the display attributes of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) may be different depending on whether or not it is a probability variation game state, and it is possible to inform or inform the player of high profit. By differentiating the number of types of symbols, the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 rather than the non-probability variation game state in which the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 and the game proceeds. In the probability variation game state that will enter the ball and progress the game, the number of types of display attributes of the big hit symbol that the transition to the probability variation game state after the special game is almost deterministic is large, Whether the game state of the player is high profit for the player And thus capable of appropriately suggest or notifiable configured for player a.

  Further, in the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the current game state and the effect display mode (background effect, etc.) are supported regardless of changes in the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The decorative design of the display attribute is variably displayed, and the decorative design corresponding to the variation of the first main game design and the decorative design corresponding to the variation of the second main game design are common display (and display attribute). (Display attributes and display areas of decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol).

(Second embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, as the decorative design, two types of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are provided so that the result of the design variation can be accurately recognized, but the configuration is prefetch lottery. Can also be applied to a configuration in which is enabled. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is to set variation mode random number delimiter information, which is information referred to when determining the prefetch effect content. That is, the first main game content determination random number is stored in step 1308, and in step 1322 (second), the hold control means MJ30 causes the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b to be flagged. By referring to the area, it is determined whether or not the special game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether the main game shortened flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b is off. To determine. In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the hold control means MJ30, based on the hold information (win / win lottery random number and symbol determination random number), the win / fail result and the stop symbol related to the stored hold. Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the hold control unit MJ30, the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM, the command relating to the newly generated hold success / failure result and the stop symbol information. To the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  Next, in step 1330 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 pre-determines the stored change-mode random number delimiter information and change-mode group according to the hold information (random number for change-mode determination) (change). Regarding the mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42), and proceed to step 1332 (second). Also, in the case of No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). In addition, in the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 sub-commands a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. When the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as the effect executed on the sub side. In such a case, , It is desirable that the player can be notified of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is the big hit (notice the stop symbol only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the big hit).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs) It is configured to determine a group.

  The main game content determination random number information, the winning / discarding random number segment information, the variation mode random number segment information, and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when the suspension occurs. The information to be transmitted to, is not limited to this, information about the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information about the profit mode of the main game symbol that is a big hit (the number of rounds of special games related to the main game symbol scheduled to be stopped, etc.) ), The number of holdings immediately after the holding winning (only the number of holdings of the winning side of the first main game side or the second main gaming side, or the number of holdings of both the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side) May be configured to be able to transmit information related to, etc. {The winning / discarding random number partition information is each game state on the first main game side (second main game side) and a random number value (or a random number value range). And the winning / absence lottery results are linked into groups. It is one of the random number division information, and for example, it is lost even if it is a probability variation game state or a non-stochastic variation game state, whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-stochastic variation game state. If it is a variation game state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-stochastic variation game state, it can be classified into groups such as losing}.

  Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the hold control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b to refer to the special game. It is determined whether the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the hold control means MJ30, based on the hold information (reasonable lottery random number and symbol determination random number), the result of winning and stopping related to the stored hold and the stop symbol. Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the hold control unit MJ30, the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM, a command relating to the newly generated hold success / failure result and stop symbol information. To the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  Next, in step 1342 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 pre-determines the stored change-mode random number delimiter information and change-mode group based on the hold information (random number for change-mode determination) (change). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 in FIGS. 32 and 33), and proceed to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sub-commands a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). .

  On the other hand, if No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the hold control means MJ30 has the main game shortened flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b turned off. Or not. If Yes in step 1336 (second), the process moves to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

  Although the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1318, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, information relating to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting lost). In addition, regarding the winning / winning lottery random number, a change in the game state (from the already-recorded pending gaming state before the winning / winning lottery related to the winning / winning lottery random number is acquired after the winning / winning lottery random number is acquired. Not only the change but also the change of the game state may occur due to the newly generated hold, so the game state at the time of executing the win / win lottery related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable), so the win / win lottery The lottery random number is stored until the process is executed. Incidentally, in the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM relating to the information on hold can be transmitted only in the non-time shortening game state at the time of the hold occurrence relating to the first main game, while the time shortening game state. In the above, it is configured so that it can be transmitted only when the hold related to the second main game occurs, but whether it is the hold related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game in any of the game states. Instead, the command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command. In addition, a specific example of the command relating to the result information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D000H: out, D001H: out of low accuracy, hit in high accuracy, D002H: hit in both low accuracy and high accuracy”. Yes, a specific example of the command relating to the stop symbol information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: per 16R probability variation, D101H: 16R non-probability variation, D102H: 2R probability variation", to the sub-main control unit SM. A specific example of the command relating to the variation random number delimiter information to be transmitted is “D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3”.

  Next, FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. Is an example. The difference from the present embodiment is that the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information are provided, that is, in the second embodiment, the variation mode for a certain random number value (or random number value range). The random number delimiter information is configured to be determined, and the number of variation mode groups (the number of random numbers separated) and the variation time and the range of random number values of the variation mode groups are different depending on the game state and the result of the lottery (for example, , The same group 1 can be different in the range of random number values), by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode group according to these gaming states It is configured to be derivable at. That is, when the game state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variation mode group scheduled when the hold occurs and the variation mode group executed when the retention is exhausted may differ. (For example, at the time of the occurrence of the hold, the variation mode group was planned to be group 1 because it was in the non-time reduction game state, but when the hold was exhausted, the variation mode group became actual group 2 because it was in the time reduction game state. However, regarding the variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all the game states, when the sub-side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (the subsequent game state It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold-ahead look-ahead effect (without considering the transition). In addition, the variation mode random number division information of FIGS. 32 and 33 is a variation of the first main game side or a variation of the second main game side, whether the winning / winning lottery result is a win or a loss, a game. Although it is configured to form different variation mode random number division information depending on whether the state is the time-reduced game state or the non-time-reduced game state, the present invention is not limited to this, and is the variation on the first main game side? One variation mode random number division including whether it is a variation on the second main game side, whether the winning / winning lottery result is a hit or a loss, and whether the gaming state is a time shortened gaming state or a non-time shortened gaming state It may be configured to form information. Also, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortening game state which is an irregular symbol change, the first main game symbol relating to the loss of the time shortening game state concerned The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured such that the variation mode for a short time is not selected regardless of the number of holdings (for example, the variation time is all 5 seconds or more). The number of holdings shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game holding and the second main game holding, but the first main in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A. It is the game holding number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, the second main game holding number.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2003 (second), that is, after performing the initial processing in step 2002, in step 2003 (second), the sub-main control unit SM sets the main side (main Based on the information received from the control board M side, the number of holdings (for example, the drawing holding counter value) is restored. Note that the information related to the effect being executed and the look-ahead effect is not restored (and the information related to the held content is not retransmitted from the main side), and the "Preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. . With this configuration, when the power interruption occurs when the background effect is “angel zone background”, which will be described later, the information stored in the sub side will be lost. After the return, the information indicating that the trigger is on hold does not remain, and the background effect is changed from the “angel background” to another background effect (a background effect such as a flatland stage described later). As a result, there is a discrepancy between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to the power failure (for example, noise at the time of power failure or restoration from the power failure). Also, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sub-side performs a zone production with a high degree of expectation while the main side is changing the degree of low expectation. Note that the process after the power interruption is not limited to this, and even after the power interruption is restored, the information indicating that the trigger is held is stored immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and is displayed as a background effect. It may be configured to maintain an “angel zone background”. In such a configuration, for example, a sub area is provided with an evacuation area that can maintain information even during the power interruption, and when the power interruption occurs, the information related to the effect is backed up in the evacuation area and the power is restored. It may be configured to restore the information backed up at times. Further, even when the power is restored, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, or when the hold occurs (even for the hold other than the newly generated hold), the information about the content of the hold may be received again from the main side. Good {Although not shown in this example, it is configured such that when the power is restored, only information regarding the number of holdings is transmitted from the main side (information regarding the content of the holding is not transmitted). . Therefore, the information related to the hold that existed at the time of power failure does not exist after the power failure returns, and therefore the prefetch effect cannot be executed for the hold (the main side holds the power when the power failure returns. May be configured to be received, and the prefetch effect may be executed for the hold). If a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, the fluctuation from the main side. A blackout screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing" etc.) will be displayed until the end command is received. In the second embodiment, it may be described that switching the background effect so as to display the "angel zone background" as the background effect, shifts to the "angel zone".

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second) and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104. Then, after adding 1 to the drawing suspension counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22, the new suspension success / failure result and the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. Is temporarily stored in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the packaging pending information display control means SM22, based on the pending occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the pending information (particularly, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information). , Etc.) is temporarily stored in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, in the case where the information regarding the hit result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information is not transmitted from the main side, in step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second), This information will not be temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new suspension is on the first main game side. If Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time prefetch determination process, which will be described later, and step 2126 (second). Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning time prefetching determination process, which will be described later, and then in step 2126 (second). Go to 2).

  Next, at step 2126 (second), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and does the new suspension have information indicating that it is a trigger suspension? It is determined whether or not (information indicating that the trigger is on hold is added in step 2576 or step 2622). If Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the packaging pending information display control means SM22 executes a prefetch pending content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, if No in step 2126 (second), the process moves to step 2118.

  On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the design suspension counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the design suspension information display control means SM22, the suspension information related to the symbol variation (particularly, hit result, stop symbol information, The variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining suspension information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. The present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, namely, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former read-ahead lottery prohibition process, first in step 2552, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game hold (first main hold) It is determined whether or not there is a hold) that is prioritized over the game side and is consumed. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether the current game state is not the time-reduced game state. If Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold in the hold. Determine whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold held by winning the winning prefetch lottery (first main game winning prefetch lottery, second main game winning prefetch lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a big hit in the hold before the new hold. To determine. If Yes in step 2560, the process moves to step 2562.

  Next, in the latter prefetch lottery process, first, in step 2562, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. Or not. If Yes in step 2562, in step 2564 the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3) for the new hold. Go to step 2574. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the holding prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing holding information temporary storage unit SM22b, and whether the new holding variation mode group is Group 3 or not. To determine. As described above, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery in consideration of the variation mode group. When determining whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery in consideration of the variation mode random number division information. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) for the new hold. Go to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process moves to step 2574.

  Next, in step 2574, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for the new hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Information indicating that there is is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 (when the second main game hold is present in the hold), in step 2578, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating "Trigger hold" from the stored information related to hold (if there is no hold in the hold that has information indicating that it is trigger hold, execute this process without executing this process. Process), and the next process {process of step 2126 (second)} is performed. Even if No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. Incidentally, in the processing of step 2578, when there is a hold (occurrence) on the second main game side, in the game machine of the second main game side priority digestion like the second embodiment, the newly generated second This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not normally executed because the scheduled fluctuation order is not achieved because the hold on the main game side is consumed first. Further, as a prohibition condition for the prefetch lottery, the prohibition condition is whether or not there is a suspension of a specific variation mode group (or a suspension of specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the suspension before the new suspension. Good.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. The present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, namely, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former read-ahead lottery prohibition process, first, at step 2602, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the current game state is the time-reduced game state. To determine. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold in the hold. Determine whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a big hit in the hold before the new hold. To determine. If Yes in step 2606, the process moves to step 2608.

  Next, in the latter prefetch lottery process, first, in step 2608, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning prefetch lottery for the big hit hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the prefetch lottery at the time of winning in 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the new hold variation mode group is the group C or not. To determine. In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning prefetch lottery for loss hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process moves to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is “trigger hold” for the new hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Information indicating that there is is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. Even if No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in both cases where the new hold is a big hit and a loss, a prefetch for the first main game side reserve rather than a prefetch lottery for the second main game side reserve It is easier to win the lottery (look-ahead lottery when the first main game hold is a big jackpot win = 1/3> prefetch lottery when the second main game hold is a big jackpot hold Winning rate = 1/5, pre-reading lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a hold that is lost = 1/10> pre-reading lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is a big jackpot hold = 1 / 15). With this configuration, even in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" relating to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" relating to the second main game side. It's easy to do.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2652, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger suspension with reference to the suspension display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and the next process (step 2118). Process). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

  Here, the two tables in the lower part of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when the display mode of the trigger hold mode that can change when the hold change effect is executed is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is iridescent, There are four types of display modes that are red, green, and blue, and three types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing) are red, green, and blue. Random numbers are drawn by random numbers exclusively for determining the mode. It should be noted that red is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit), while blue is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). The big hit expectation degree for each display mode of the hold when the occurrence occurs (the expectation degree to be a big hit due to the pattern change related to the hold), the rainbow color is selected only at the time of the big hit. The order is from highest to red, green, and blue. Note that the display modes that can be changed are merely examples, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased and the colors that can be changed are changed. Further, in the present example, the display color of the hold is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit (or in combination with the degree of expectation of a big hit). ), It may be configured to suggest a game state after execution of the special game. In such a case, especially in the probability variation game state, the display color of the hold suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change game state after execution of the special game when a big hit occurs in the hold. (For example, if the pending display color is red, the probability change expectation is high, if the hold display color is blue, the probability change expectation is low, etc.), it is possible to determine whether the probability variation game state, which is advantageous to the player, continues or ends. It is possible to execute a stunning and effective presentation.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation degree may be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of types of hold display modes. Further, the pre-reading effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing of winning the pre-reading lottery to the end of variation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). With such a configuration, for example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the prefetch effect, if the hold display mode that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time The hold display mode that changes in the hold change effect is set to green or red, that is, each time the hold change effect is executed, the hold display mode changes to a high hold expectation display mode (rank up). It is desirable to configure it so that it does not spoil the player's expectations. Further, the effect related to the hold display change is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not accompany the hold display change may be provided, and for example, the hold quivers when the fluctuation starts (or when the hold is exhausted). It is possible to provide an effect mode (so-called gaze pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is about step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), and the purpose thereof is the stop design (including temporary stop) of the first decorative design, in particular, the above-mentioned " The purpose is to change the factor for determining the "special symbol" (that is, a symbol that does not mean a big hit, but that gives a notice in advance that a big hit can occur). That is, in step 2204, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2206 (second), the packaging display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n). Refers to the symbol information (variation mode relating to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol {For example, if the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-term variation, non-reach, if it is a long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b is determined. (And the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). To migrate to 08.

  Further, in step 2216, after determining the decorative symbol effect content and setting the display update timing and the display update content, in step 2250 (second), the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n causes the notice effect / appearance described later. The figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218. That is, the stop design of the first decorative design (including the temporary stop) will be determined by the notice effect / design stop design determination process, which will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the notice production / design stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2252, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the variation is a trigger suspension variation. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice effect contents from the "special notice effect candidates". Here, the "special notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is an "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and the next process (the process of step 2218) ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the above-mentioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, and the reason is that the "angel zone" described later. In the case of "background" (that is, a state in which the presence of a hold with a high expectation for a big hit has already been notified), the aforementioned "special symbol" (that does not mean a big hit, but a big hit may occur after that) This is because, if the (previous symbol) is stopped and displayed, there is a danger that a double notification of similar information may be given, resulting in a mysterious effect for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2252, at step 2256, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a trigger suspension in the suspension. If Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the angel zone entry flag is off. If Yes in step 2258, the process moves to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2258, the process moves to step 2260.

  Next, in step 2264, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice effect contents from the "normal notice effect candidates". Here, the "normal notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2266, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol to be a "special symbol", and based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the first decorative symbol Temporary stop symbols in the left column and the right column are determined (the symbols different from those in the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is the group 3 {By this process, the variation which is not the group 3 is The angel zone transfer lottery described below is not applicable to the angel zone transfer lottery to be described later, and changes related to the holding of Group 3 that did not win the pre-reading lottery (pre-reading lottery at the time of winning) (not trigger hold) Subject to the lottery}. If Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the notice effect display control means SM24 causes the variation to be a pseudo continuous variation (a variation in which the pseudo variation is executed at least once, and in this example, illustrated in FIGS. It is determined whether or not there is a variation in which effects such as A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) are executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the notice effect display control means SM24 changes the background effect to the angel zone background while the angel zone transition lottery is elected with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example). Or not) is executed. Next, in step 2276, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice effect contents from "normal notice effect candidate → special notice effect candidate after special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, in FIG. 21). In the case of A-1 and A-2, the notice effect contents are decided from the "normal notice effect candidate" from the start of the change to 14 seconds, and after the start of the change, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing, after 14 seconds. , The content of the notice production is determined from the "special notice production candidate"). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the first time of the main game symbol (first time in the pseudo continuous variation) to "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to the angel zone). It is determined to be a decorative design that informs the player that), and based on the information about the stop design of the main game design, the temporary design of the left column and the right column of the first decorative design is the same design (the same as in the case of reach). Stop mode), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218). In addition, the temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2270, step 2272, or step 2276, at step 2282, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice effect content from the "normal notice effect candidate". Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information about the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and the next process (the process of step 2218) ).

  In the second embodiment, in step 2274, the angel zone transfer lottery is executed to determine whether or not the variable angel zone transfer is possible (the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle of the transition is a "special symbol", and the special symbol is changed). It is configured to decide whether to move to the angel zone with a temporary stop as an opportunity, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo continuous pattern (the first middle row temporary stop pattern) and the notice effect A plurality of candidates may be provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous variation, a combination of the pseudo continuous symbol and the notice effect may be determined from the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidates, "pseudo continuous symbol A, notice effect 1", "pseudo consecutive symbol A, notice effect 2", "pseudo consecutive symbol A, notice effect 3", "pseudo consecutive symbol A, notice" Six combination candidates of "production 4", "special design, notice production 1" and "special design, notice production 2" are provided, and a combination of the pseudo-relational pattern and the notice production is determined by lottery from the candidates, and the pseudo-reproduction is performed. When the combination of the pseudo-repeated symbol and the notice effect in which the symbol is the “special symbol” is selected, it may be configured to shift to the angel zone during the change. The method of determining the combination of the pseudo-relational pattern and the notice effect is not limited to the pseudo continuous variation, and the determination method may be used in other variation modes. Further, the combination is not limited to the pseudo-relational pattern and the notice effect, and may include a background effect, a sound mode, and the like.

  Further, as a method of determining the notice effect, first, a basic notice effect of the notice effects (a notice effect that can be executed regardless of the background effect being executed, an effect that is executed in the first half of the change, etc.) is determined. After that, based on the decided basic notice effect, the effect other than the notice effect such as the background effect is decided, the decided effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.) is executed, and then the decision is made. It may be configured to determine an undecided effect among the notice effects based on the basic notice effect and the decided effect other than the notice effect such as the background effect (the determination method is repeated a plurality of times. , May be configured to determine all of the notice effects executed by the fluctuation). With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect executed in the variation at a plurality of timings, and it is caused by determining all the advance notice effects executed in the variation at one timing. It will be possible to reduce the defects of the production. In this example, (1) “determined stop”: the confirmed stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the symbol combination that has been fixedly stopped is a big hit (three of the same symbols are aligned), a special game is started. , If it is lost (not having 3 of the same symbol), it does not shift to the special game, (2) “Temporary stop”: Temporary stop is executed before the fixed stop (for example, swing fluctuation), one time Pseudo-fluctuation can be executed by re-changing after temporarily stopping in the middle of the fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation, (3) When the "special symbol" is displayed during the prefetch effect execution, the "special symbol" is determined as a stop. Not only is it displayed, but it is also configured to be displayed as a temporary stop before a fixed stop. Further, in this example, the fixed stop and the final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both the fixed stop and the temporary stop, but the stop symbol in the fluctuation of the main game symbol is the fixed stop symbol. It is used for, and the stop symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol is used for both the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol (the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is "777", etc. = It is a fixed stop design).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram showing an example of the notice effect / design stop symbol display. As shown in the upper part of the image diagram, in the present example, when the transition to the angel zone in the variation, as a background effect, a normal background effect (an example of a background effect that is not an angel zone background effect) is being executed, The "special symbol" is stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. Further, triggered by the temporary stop of the "special symbol", the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In addition, in this example, the case of a big hit is illustrated, but the background effect is also configured to be switched in the same manner even when a lose occurs. {For the temporary stop of the "special symbol" in this case, There are cases where the decorative pattern is sparse (different patterns), but there is also a case where it does not become (the same pattern) (= the "special pattern" may be temporarily stopped after the reach)}.

  Also, as shown in the middle of the image diagram, in this example, when other pseudo continuous fluctuations that do not accompany the transition to the angel zone are performed (when the angel zone transition lottery is not won), the normal background effect is used as the background effect. Under the situation that is being executed, as the first middle row temporary stop symbol, "pseudo continuous symbol A" (different from "special symbol", a temporary stop symbol that informs the player that a pseudo continuous variation is being performed) ) Temporarily stops. Next, even after the "pseudo continuous symbol A" is temporarily stopped, the background effect is normally the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of the image diagram, in the present example, when the normal design is being performed as the background production, when the decorative design is changing, and if the winning pre-reading lottery is won, it stops when the variation stops. As a design, the lost design (interlaced pattern) stops. After that, the next variation is started, and the “special symbol” is stopped as a symbol for the variation (that is, the variation is the pre-reading angel zone pre-entry variation). Next, triggered by the stop of the "special symbol", the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next change (that is, the next change is the first change in the prefetch zone). In this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol variation related to the hold of the digestion schedule before the trigger hold, the temporary stop is not made except for the fixed stop (the previous temporary stop). (It is not used when changing again after being temporarily stopped as a pseudo-variable stop pattern). In other words, in the symbol fluctuation related to the holding of the digestion schedule before the trigger hold, the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo fluctuation is executed, and the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold from the timing when the symbol fluctuation is lost. Until the angel zone background can't be displayed. As described above, in the second embodiment, by stopping (or temporarily stopping) the “special symbol”, the angel zone background effect is configured to be executed, so that the player stops the “special symbol”. By visually recognizing (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize that it will move to the angel zone, and not only at the time of variable stop (at the time of stop related to the confirmation display), but also at the time of temporary stop during the change, the “special It is possible to have a feeling of expectation for stop (or temporary stop) of "design".

  As shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" is stopped as a temporary stop symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the same numbers in the left column and the right column are stopped (temporary stop) (at the time of reach). On the other hand, when the "special symbol" is stopped as the final stop symbol of the next change after the pre-reading lottery, the numbers different from the left column and the right column are arranged to stop. There is.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting “angel zone background” as the background effect in step 2504, in step 2506 (second), background effect display control means. The SM 23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change (a part of the pseudo continuous change) that triggered the transition of the "Angel Zone" (or to the hold) Fluctuation) (the fluctuation (or fluctuation related to the hold) that triggered the transition of the “Angel Zone” is the fluctuation related to the trigger hold or the fluctuation related to the moving angel zone). judge. If Yes in step 2506 (second), the process proceeds to step 2508, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has the first decorative design and the second decorative design as the decorative design, and is configured to be capable of executing the so-called hold-ahead look-ahead effect. Therefore, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the degree of expectation of transition to the special game is increased is configured to be executed. Then, with respect to the hold that becomes the digestion order before the hold (trigger hold) that becomes the trigger of the hold prefetching effect, the "special symbol" is displayed as a stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes during the hold digestion. Therefore, the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbol" in this case is "the symbol variation has ended" and "the expectation of shifting to the special game has increased". On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, since the "special symbol" can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol at the time of the symbol change of the first decorative symbol when the hold is exhausted, the meaning of the "special symbol" in this case being stopped and displayed is , "The symbol fluctuation is changed again" and "The degree of expectation of shifting to the special game is increased". As described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, although the same type of "special symbol", depending on the timing (or the situation) at which it is stopped and displayed, a novel production method that has different meanings is created. You will be able to do it.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, with respect to the hold that is in the digestion order before the trigger hold, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol at the time of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol during the hold digestion. Regarding the trigger hold, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol at the time of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol at the time of the hold digestion, the same kind of "special symbol" is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "special symbol" in the former case may be the "special symbol A", and the "special symbol" in the latter case may be the "special symbol B". With this configuration, it is possible to clearly convey the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbol" in both cases to the player. Further, the probability that the "special symbol" is displayed in the former case may be lower than the probability that the "special symbol" is displayed in the latter case.

  Further, in the present example, the symbol rows of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are three, and the effective line is one line, but there is no problem even if these are changed, for example, (1) "special symbol" The number of symbols and / or the number of activated lines increases when the symbol stops (for example, the number of activated lines becomes nine). (2) The number of symbols and / or the number of activated lines increases when the "special symbol" stops. The line decreases (for example, the number of symbols becomes two, and one of the symbols stops to reach the reach state. Furthermore, the number of symbols becomes one and the = notification is made almost definitively. May notify the difference in the profit rate given to the player by the type of the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, depending on the timing (or the situation) at which the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed, the "special symbol" has a different meaning, but the so-called hold prefetch effect and the "special symbol" are used. It is possible to create a more innovative production method by further increasing the interlocking with. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2220 (second variation 1) to step 2224 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is, regarding the hold whose display mode has been changed by the hold prefetching effect, when the hold is consumed. The effect content in is to be configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, the decorative symbol effect contents are determined, the display update timing and the display update contents are set, and then, in step 2220 (second variation 1), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the drawing suspension information. With reference to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the hold display mode related to the variation is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific hold display mode different from other hold display modes, in this example, red). To do. If Yes in step 2220 (second variation 1), in step 2222 (second variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the notice effect content from the "exclusive notice effect candidate". Here, the "exclusive notice effect candidate" is an effect candidate that is selected only in the variation related to the suspension of the dedicated effect display mode (red in this example) that is a specific suspended display mode. , A battle effect with a specific enemy character may be configured to be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation related to the “exclusive notice effect candidate” is configured such that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively higher than that of the other notice effect candidates. Next, in step 2223 (second variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and step 2218. Move to. If the answer is No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2250 (second). Here, if it is configured so that the "special symbol" can be easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold display mode is the special effect display mode, and the first decorative symbol It is possible to further enhance the interlocking property with the fact that the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

  With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, as a notice effect candidate, a special effect display mode (red in this example) that is a specific hold display mode is reserved. By configuring so that the "exclusive notice effect candidate", which is the effect candidate selected only in the change related to the above, can be selected, at the time of executing the hold change effect (effect in which the hold display mode changes) based on the winning of the prefetch lottery. , It is possible to provide a notice effect that is executed only when a change is made to a specific hold display mode, and by increasing the jackpot expectation degree when the effect is executed, the player can change the hold when the hold change occurs. The display color (hold change execution mode) will be paid attention to, which will increase the fun of the game. In the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect executed by the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is not determined when the trigger hold occurs, but is determined when the trigger hold is exhausted. With such a configuration, "a trigger hold occurs → a hold display mode is determined and displayed in the display mode → trigger hold is exhausted → hold display related to trigger hold Based on the aspect, the effect executed by the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is determined. " It should be noted that there is no problem in applying the configuration related to the pending digestion transmission image described below to the first modification from the second embodiment.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed as a so-called hold prefetching effect and the hold display mode becomes the exclusive effect display mode (red in this example), the notice effect contents Is configured to be selected from the "exclusive notice effect candidate", but the hold change effect is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold change effect It may be configured to further associate the stop of the "special symbol" with, for example, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are provided as the "special symbol", and the "special symbol A" is stopped. In this case, while changing to a hold display mode other than red as the hold change effect, it may be configured to change to a red hold display mode as the hold change effect when the "special symbol B" is stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interlocking effect between the so-called hold-ahead read effect and the "special symbol".

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the so-called hold-ahead look-ahead effect and the "special symbol" are configured to be more interlocking with each other, but this interlocking is achieved between the first main game side and the second main game side. The strength of sex may be different, and an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification 2 of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) and step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the purpose of which is the first main Depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side, the control is to change the selection rate of the "special symbol". That is, in step 2216, after determining the decorative symbol effect contents and setting the display update timing and the display update contents, in step 2226 (second variation 2), the package drawing display content determination means SM21n causes the main side information temporary storage. With reference to the means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (1) (second variation 2), the design drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect / design stop symbol, which will be described later. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the drawing display content determination means SM21n causes the second main game notice production / stop of the drawing to be described later. The symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a modification example 2 from the second embodiment, which relates to a subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) in FIG. It is a flowchart of. The process of this subroutine is the same process as the notice effect / design stop symbol determination process of step 2250 (second), and therefore its explanation is omitted. In the second embodiment, the same processing is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side in the second embodiment, but in the second modification from the second embodiment, It is intended to execute different processes on the first main game side and the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a modification example 2 from the second embodiment, which relates to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52, the second main game notice effect / design stop design determination processing. It is a flowchart of. Since the process of this subroutine is similar to the notice effect / design stop symbol determination process of step 2250 (second), only the difference from the process will be described in detail. The difference from the notice effect / design stop design determination processing of step 2250 (second) is step 2286 (second variation 2) and step 2288 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2256, the reservation is suspended. If there is no trigger hold in step 2, in step 2286 (second change 2), the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is a change related to the group C. Or not. If Yes in step 2286 (second variation 2), in step 2272, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and is the variation a variation in which pseudo continuous variation is executed? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the notice effect display control means SM24 has a predetermined probability (the angel zone transfer lottery winning ratio of the first main game executed in step 2274, which is 1). The probability is lower than / 10, and in this example, the angel zone transfer lottery for winning 1/30) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2276. In addition, in the case of No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2282.

  With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the angel zone transfer lottery (pseudo) is performed by the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side and the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side. "Special symbol" is temporarily stopped due to continuous fluctuation, and by selecting different winning probabilities of whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as the background effect), it is possible to change the symbol on the first main game side. It is possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether there is a symbol fluctuation on the second main game side, so that the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side It is possible to widen the range of production by making the production tendency involved and the production tendency accompanying the variation of the symbol on the side of the second main game different so as to enhance the interest in production.

  In addition, in the modification example 2 from the second embodiment, in the non-time-reduced game state, the second main game hold is configured not to be the trigger hold, so the second main in the non-time-reduced game state. The hold prefetching effect for the hold on the game side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time reduction game state, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the first main game side holding destination reading effect and the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the second main game side holding destination reading effect are compared. However, the appearance rates are different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as described above, the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" by the pseudo continuous variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. Depending on (the higher the probability of depending on the symbol variation on the first main game side "special symbol" is temporarily stopped), is the first main game side also hold for the trigger easiness of occurrence? , It depends on whether or not the second main game is on hold (the first main game side hold is more likely to be trigger hold), so trigger hold occurs → hold hold that is digested before trigger hold At the time of digestion, the "special symbol" is fixedly displayed (so-called hold prefetch effect is executed) → When the trigger hold is exhausted, the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped (so-called pseudo continuous variation is executed), The probability that a series of production flows will occur in the first main game It is also possible to configure so that the direction of the high-probability than the second main player side. Further, in the non-time shortening game state, the appearance rate of the symbol fluctuation in which the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped by the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation related to the first main gaming symbol and the pseudo continuous in the symbol variation related to the second main gaming symbol The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the variation, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation, the difference (the former difference) related to the pseudo continuous variation is smaller.

  Further, in the present example, (1) the first main game side and the second main game side may have the same selection probability (appearance rate) of the "special symbol", and (2) a big jackpot is held. If it exists in the second main game hold, "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect does not appear in the variation of the second main game symbol, (3) there is a big jackpot hold in the first main game hold If there is a "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect can appear in the variation of the first main game symbol, (4) "special symbol" relating to the pseudo continuous variation in the case of a variation that becomes a big hit of the second main game symbol May not appear or is difficult to appear, (5) in the case of a variation that becomes a big hit of the first main game symbol, a "special symbol" related to the pseudo continuous variation may appear or is likely to occur. Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured to be able to appear during the prefetching effect or the pseudo continuous variation, but the "special symbol A" can appear only during the prefetching effect. "Special symbol", "special symbol B" as a "special symbol" that can appear only during pseudo continuous variation, and the appearance rates of "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are compared, and the second main game symbol In the variation, the "special symbol A" does not appear, in the variation of the second main game symbol, the "special symbol B" has a low appearance rate, and the like.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are configured to be executable as the so-called hold-ahead read effect, but a new playability is created by changing the execution mode of the hold-ahead read effect. It is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification 3 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variation 3) and step 2750 (second variation 3), that is, after executing the decorative symbol display content determination processing in step 2200, step 2700 ( In the second modification 3), the sub-control board S executes a pending display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2750 (second variation 3), the sub control board S executes a reserved digestion transfer image display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), and the purpose thereof is to notify that the certain hold is under digestion (during pattern change) when the certain hold is exhausted. Is to be able to display the image. That is, in step 2112, after subtracting 1 from the design suspension counter value, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the design suspension information display control means SM22 displays the suspension information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the display mode). And the variation mode group information), "holding digestion transmission image information" (the pending display of the digest to be digested, which is related to the variation to be started, is in the transition to start (the variation to be started is started, and the suspension is It is temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b as "information relating to the" holding digestion transmission image "} which is continuously displayed even after being digested", and the process proceeds to step 2128 (second). To do. In the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, the second main game winning time prefetching determination process is deleted (the prefetch lottery is executed only on the first main gaming side).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second variation 3) of FIG. 56 in the third modification from the second embodiment. Here, the present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery, first, at step 2580, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is the second main game. It is determined whether or not it is a hold (a hold that is given priority over the first main game hold). If Yes in step 2580, in step 2582, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the change mode group of the hold before the new hold is group 1 It is determined whether or not (there is no hold that is a big hit before the new hold, a hold that can be a long-time variable time, or a trigger hold). If Yes in step 2584, the process moves to step 2586.

  Next, in the latter process related to the prefetch lottery, first in step 2586, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and the new hold variation mode group is set. It is determined whether or not it is the group 3. Even if the number of pending changes at the start of fluctuation is large (for example, the number of pending is 2 or 3) , A relatively long fluctuation time}. If Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, if the hold is a big hit hold, 2/3, and if the hold is 1/8 probability). Execute a pre-reading lottery when winning. Next, in step 2590, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds the information indicating "trigger hold" to the new hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be "yellow zako hold" and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in the winning pre-reading lottery, and the hold display mode can be a display mode different from the normal hold mode. Next, in step 2592, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold (trigger hold) is present and the current hold count until the trigger hold plan is exhausted ( For example, the execution plan of the effect such as green Zako hold at the start of the next change, change to red Zako hold at the start of the next change, etc.) is determined and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, The process shifts to the next process (process of step 2118).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2580 (when the new hold is the second main game hold), in step 2596, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information indicating that the "trigger hold" is deleted from the information related to the first main game hold that is performed (when the hold having the information indicating the trigger hold is not present in the hold, this process is executed. The process proceeds to the next process without performing), changes the hold display mode to “normal hold” (for example, white hold), and stores it in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Move to. Even if No in Step 2582, Step 2584, Step 2586, or 2590, the process proceeds to Step 2594.

  Next, in step 2594, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines that the new hold display mode of the new hold is "normal hold" (for example, white hold), and the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b stores it. The information is stored in the suspension information temporary storage area, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118). Here, the processing of step 2596 and step 2594 newly occurs in the gaming machine of the second main gaming side priority digestion like this example when the second main gaming side has a hold (occurs). Since the hold on the second main game side is consumed first, the planned change order is not achieved, and the look-ahead effect (for example, hold display mode change effect based on the hold change plan) over a plurality of changes is not normally executed. This is a configuration for avoiding.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second variation 3), step 2222 (second variation 3) to step 2226 (second variation 3), and step 2228 (second variation 3), that is, In step 2206 (second), after determining the variation mode of the first decorative symbol, in step 2208 (second variation 3), the packaging display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, reach effect display). The content determination means SM25n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and refers to the variation mode of the second decorative symbol (for example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-term variation, non- Reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined in the case of long-term fluctuation}, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM) 4b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b). Next, in step 2216, the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n determines whether or not the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b and whether or not the result is a decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern). Based on the variation mode, the decorative symbol effect content is determined by referring to the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative symbol effect table 1 to the decorative symbol effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the variation of the design symbol, The display update timing and the display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21n draws and determines the content of the notice effect to be executed during the variation. Here, as shown in the notice content image diagram on the right side of the figure, in this example, the content of the notice effect that can be executed is different depending on the image (so-called stay stage) set as the background effect. It should be noted that the content lottery of the notice effect to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number acquired on the sub-main control unit SM side, the result of winning or losing the fluctuation, the winning symbol, the fluctuation time, and the like. Here, the notice effect contents marked with a star in the image diagram are the particular notice effects in this example, and are configured such that different notice effects can be executed based on the stay stage (the notice effects). Will be described later in the process). Further, the content of the notice production (in this example, the production that can be executed before the reach production or the like) is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to execute the pseudo continuous production (the production in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed). It may be configured (in that case, the hold digestion transmission image and the display mode of the hold described later in the pseudo continuous production may be changed, or the hold digestion transmission image described below by the notice production executed during the pseudo continuous production. Or the display mode of the hold may be changed).

  Next, in step 2224 (second variation 3), the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the "holding digestion transmission image information" temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the variation is determined. It is determined whether or not there is a change related to trigger hold. If Yes in step 2224 (second variation 3), in step 2226 (second variation 3), the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n causes the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b (or the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), Based on "holding digestion transmission image information" related to the relevant change, change mode, or notice effect, the pending digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped: yellow zako hold → green zako Button execution during hold, reach: execution plan of effect such as change from green zako hold to red star hold) is determined and stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2218. Even if No in step 2224 (second variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2218.

  Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (second variation 3), the package drawing display content determining means SM21n turns on the symbol content determining flag in the flag area of the map drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21. The on-hold display mode change process execution flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the drawing-reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing-reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 confirms the reservation change plan stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2710, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines, based on the suspension change plan, whether the suspension display mode is to be changed during the change.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and refers to the specific notice effect during the notice effect executed during the change (see FIG. 49). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is based on the notice mode temporarily stored in the first diagram variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. , It is determined whether or not the execution timing of the specific notice effect has been reached. If Yes in step 2714, the process moves to step 2718 (the display mode of the hold will be changed in accordance with the execution of the specific notice effect).

  Here, FIG. 60 is a hold change image diagram in the specific notice effect. In this example, an example is described in which the hold display mode is changed according to the grass unevenness notice in the flatland zone (particularly, the grassland unevenness notice in which the snake appears, which is a specific notice effect). First, in the state where there is a trigger hold in the hold, the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger hold starts (in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is normal hold (white hold)).

  Next, a notice of grass unevenness, which is the changing presentation, is executed, and an image for searching through the grass and looking for something is displayed.

  Next, an image in which a snake (the expectation that a big hit during the fluctuation is “low”) appears from behind the grass is displayed.

  Here, if there is no plan to change the hold display during the change, an image in which a snake that appears from behind the grass is leaving the screen is displayed, and the notice production ends.

  On the other hand, when there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, unlike the above case, an image in which the snake that appeared from behind the grass grass jumps into the hold (trigger hold that is normally held at this point) is displayed. It After that, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) in which the snake jumps in changes, and the hold display mode (Zako hold in this example) different from the normal hold is displayed. In addition, you may comprise so that the effect | action (what is called a gaze effect) which the display mode of a hold does not change even if the said specific notice effect is performed can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific notice effect is not executed during the change), in step 2716, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 is a general-purpose suspension change effect (can be executed independently of other effects. In addition, it is a production that can be executed in any production stage, for example, a command for displaying a production in which the hold explodes is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 2718.

  Next, in step 2718, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger holding based on the holding change plan stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the drawing holding information. It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2720, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next processing {step 2750 is performed. (Process of (2nd variation 3)}). If No in step 2704, step 2706, or step 2710, the process proceeds to step 2720. If No in step 2702 or step 2714, the next process {process of step 2750 (second variation 3)} is performed. Transition.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the reservation digestion transfer image display process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the design drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. If Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b to determine whether or not the hold digestion transmission image display flag is off. To determine. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transfer image based on the hold digestion transfer image information temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Initial display mode) is determined. Here, the hold digestion transmission image is an image that continuously displays the hold related to the change even during the change (after the change starts and the hold related to the change is consumed). . By displaying the hold digestion transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the change is a change related to the Zako hold even during a change related to the hold (for example, Zako hold) whose display mode is changed in the hold. The effect of changing the display mode of the held digestion transfer image can be executed during the change.

  Next, in step 2758, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the holding digestion transmission image display flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, if No in step 2754, the process moves to step 2760.

  Next, in step 2760, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and confirms the reservation digest transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the packaging pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change or delete the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image based on the pending digestive transfer image change plan. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the designing map pending information display control means SM22 displays the pending digestion transmitting image based on the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the pending digestion transmitting image change plan. It is determined whether or not a change timing (for example, a re-variation start after the pseudo continuous symbol temporary stop display, a predetermined performance execution, a predetermined period during the reach performance) is reached. If Yes in step 2764, in step 2766 the packaging reservation information display control means SM22 causes the reservation digestion transmission image display mode change condition (for example, pressing of the sub input button during the predetermined period, the maximum number of reservations, etc.). It is determined whether or not is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768 and step 2770, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general suspension change effect (for example, an effect that the suspension explodes) (display command transmission of step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the display mode of the held digestive transfer image is changed based on the reserved digestive transfer image change plan (for example, red star hold, green zako hold, no display, etc.). The display mode is changed to), the drawing suspension information is temporarily stored in the storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780. Even if No in step 2762 or step 2766, the process proceeds to step 2780.

  Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in the retained digestion transmission image. The change of the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image in the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow shown in the figure. In this example, a pattern in which the battle effect does not end in the first half and is shifted (developed) to the battle effect (second half) is illustrated. First, the fluctuation related to the trigger hold (currently Zako hold) starts, and Zako hold is displayed as a hold digestion transmission image.

  Next, a battle effect (first half) is executed as the effect during the change. In this example, when the hold digestion transmission image is Zako hold, it is possible to change the display mode of the Zako hold by pressing the sub input button a predetermined number of times during execution of the battle effect (first half) in the variation. Is configured. In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub input button while the battle effect (first half) is being executed, but an effect that prompts the player to operate (press the sub input button) Since it is not particularly executed, the operation of the sub input button is input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

  If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub input button a predetermined number of times) during the execution of the battle production (first half), each time you press the sub input button, the Zako hold displayed as the hold digest transmission image is attacked. Effect image is displayed.

  Next, when the number of times the sub input button is pressed in the battle effect (first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image in which the Zako hold that is the hold digestion transmission image explodes is displayed, and based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan, The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of hold is changed to red star hold or no display). Even after the transition to the battle production (second half), the hold digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode is changed. Since there is an intention to predict the jackpot expectation degree of the variation depending on the display mode of the transfer image, the hold digestion transfer image is continuously displayed in the display mode after the display mode is changed, even after shifting to the battle production (second half). }.

  On the other hand, if the button is not hit repeatedly in the battle effect (first half) (or if the number of times the button is hit is less than the predetermined number of times), the hold digestion transmission image, Zako Hold, automatically explodes at the timing of shifting to the battle effect (second half). While the image is displayed, the display of the hold digestion transfer image is erased. (The hold digestion transfer image change plan is considered in consideration of the player who does not anticipate the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation by not hitting the button intentionally. Erase the display regardless of the contents of). In this example, the jackpot expectation of Zako holding is medium, and the jackpot expectation of Akaboshi holding is high. In addition, when the battle effect (second half) is executed, the jackpot expectation level is suddenly increased as compared with the case where the battle effect (first half) is executed. Here, when the transition to the battle production (second half) and the jackpot expectation level has risen, if the display of Zako holding, where the jackpot expectation degree is medium, is continued, the battle production that is a jackpot expectation degree is high. Although the interest of (the latter half) may be impaired, a production with a high degree of expectation (this example, battle production (the latter half)) that does not have high expectations (Zako hold in this example) is started By erasing, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly shown in this example, even when the number of times the sub-input button is pressed is less than the predetermined number, the display mode change timing of the hold digestion transfer image is based on the hold digestion transfer image change plan. You may comprise so that the display mode of a reservation digestion transmission image may be changed automatically. In such a configuration, for example, only when the change to the display mode that suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation is planned, the display mode of the held digestive transfer image is automatically changed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the button is not hit repeatedly (or the number of hits is less than a predetermined number), the display mode of the held digestion transfer image is automatically changed at a predetermined timing only when the fluctuation is a big hit or a probability change big hit. It may be configured to be performed (so-called accurate production can be executed).

  In the case of transitioning to the battle effect (second half) without passing through the battle effect (first half) {for example, start of variation of the drawing (all rows) → advance notice effect 1, display of temporary stop of drawing (left row) → provisional drawing) Stop display (right column) → Reach development fanfare → Battle reach (latter half) image display → Temporary drawing display of stoppage (middle row) → Execution depending on whether it is right or wrong → Display of final confirmation of display (all rows) Is executed}, that is, in the case of transitioning to the battle production (second half) without the period of button repeated hits (in this example, battle production (first half)), the timing of transition to the battle production (second half) Then, the holding digest transmission image, Zako Hold, automatically explodes, and the display mode of the holding digest transmission image is changed and displayed based on the holding digest transmission image change plan. Although not particularly shown in this example, the number of times the sub-input button is pressed to change the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image has a high expectation of a big hit in the variation (a hold display mode of high expectation). It may be configured such that a larger number of times is more likely to be selected. Although not particularly shown in this example, when the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image changes, in addition to the general-purpose hold change effect, an effect that suggests the content of the change (for example, when the Zako hold explodes) It may be configured to be able to execute the end of life announcement that issues a line. As the content suggested by the end-of-life announcement, the degree of expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation and the content of the effect to be executed are suggested (for example, "Achichi!" = 60% or more of expectation of a big hit, "Congratulations!" = Big hit confirmation, "Bosuu!" = Battle reach development with boss character, etc.) can be configured, but if the player does not press the sub input button, the jackpot expectation degree related to the fluctuation is set. Assuming that the player does not want to expect, it is preferable to configure not to execute the end-of-life notice concerning the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation (only the end-of-life notice regarding the performance contents to be executed can be executed). . That is, only when the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed by the player's operation, the notice effect related to the jackpot expectation degree of the variation may be executed based on the result of the variation. The effect of the battle effect (first half) can be executed in “a4” and “b4”, which are the fluctuation times of 30 seconds.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 2764 (when it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image), in step 2772 the packaging reservation information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transfer image. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to erase. If Yes in step 2772, in step 2774 the packaging reservation information display control means SM22 determines the display mode erasing condition of the hold digestion transmission image (for example, no pressing of the sub input button during the predetermined period, the number of pressing of the sub input button). Is less than a predetermined number of times, etc.) is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2774, in step 2776 and step 2778, the mounting suspension information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose suspension change effect (for example, an effect that the suspension explodes) (display command transmission of step 2999). It is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process) and the display mode of the held digestive transfer image is changed to "no display" (changed to "no display" regardless of the contents of the held digestive transfer image change plan) ) And temporarily stores it in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2780.

  Next, in step 2780, the designing pending information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the pending digestive transmitting image based on the display mode of the pending digestive transmitting image temporarily stored in the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b. (It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2752, in step 2782, the designing map pending information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag in the flag area of the drawing designing related information temporary storage means SM21b. . Next, in step 2784, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the held digestion transmission image to "no display" and temporarily stores it in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transfer image based on the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image temporarily stored in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b (the process. Then, a command to hide the held digestion transmission image is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the next process (process of step 2300) is performed. Move to.

  In addition, in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, the holding digestion transmission image is configured to be displayed, but the holding digestion transmission image may not always be displayed. For example, the holding display mode is normally held. The hold digest transmission image corresponding to the hold that has been digested may not be displayed, and the hold digest transmission image corresponding to the reserve in which the hold display mode is changed from the normal hold may be displayed. With such a configuration, the player confirms the hold digestion transfer image at a timing when the player wants to know the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation, and if the hold digestion transfer image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high, If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 46 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2524 (second variation 3) to step 2534 (second variation 3), that is, if the angel zone flag is off in step 2502, step 2524 (second variation). In 2nd variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decorative symbol based on the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2524 (second variation 3), in step 2526 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to hold the trigger in suspension (previously described). It is determined whether or not there is a hold held in the prefetch lottery at the time of winning the first main game. If Yes in step 2526 (second variation 3), in step 2528 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes the angel zone transfer lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). To do. Next, in step 2530 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2528 (second variation 3) to determine whether or not the angel zone transfer lottery is won. . If Yes in step 2530 (second variation 3), in step 2532 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. It is turned on and the process proceeds to step 2504.

  After setting "Angel Zone Background" as the background effect in step 2504, in step 2534 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 causes the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing reservation information temporary. By referring to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is completed. If Yes in step 2534 (second variation 3), the process moves to step 2508, and if No, the process moves to step 2520.

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 3 from the second embodiment, the sub-main control is performed with respect to the hold with a high expectation that becomes a big hit (in particular, the hold on the first main game side). The display mode of the hold on the part SM side can be changed and displayed, and when a predetermined notice effect (in this example, a notice effect of a specific notice, particularly a notice effect of low expectation) is executed, the predetermined notice effect is executed. It is configured such that the hold display mode can be changed and displayed in accordance with the notice effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even in the case of a notice effect with a low expectation for a big hit in the change, the hold display mode may be changed, so that the player's interest in the notice effect can be increased and the enjoyment of the game is improved. It becomes possible. Also, if the jackpot expectation level rises after the transition to the battle production (second half), if the Zako holding with the medium jackpot expectation degree is kept displayed, the battle production is a production with a high jackpot expectation degree. Since the interest of (the latter half) may be impaired, even if there is no operation by the player, the expectation is not high at the timing when the production with high expectation (this example, battle presentation (second half)) starts ( In this example, Zako hold) is hidden and it is possible to prevent the interest of the production from being impaired. In addition, it is a condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period in which a predetermined effect (for example, battle reach (first half)) while the symbol is changing is being executed. As, as the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image can be changed, it can be a player participation type effect, and a player who does not want to know the jackpot expectation degree of the change by the effect can perform the predetermined operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which the display mode of the held digestion transmitted image becomes an effect that does not suggest the jackpot expectation (for example, erased held digestion transmitted image).

  In the third modification from the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are provided as the prefetch effect, and only the hold change effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times during the prefetch effect. However, the background change effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times during the prefetch effect execution (for example, even after the change to the "angel zone background", the change to the "true angel zone background"). In the case of such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the greater the number of times of execution), the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit due to the variation related to the prefetch effect being executed (rank). It is desirable to configure so that it will be updated). It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (does not rank up) during the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension.

(Third Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to start and stop changing at substantially the same time as the main game symbol, but the changing mode of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. .. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the third embodiment, inside the second special winning opening C20, there is a specific area C22 which is an area that triggers the transition to the probability variation gaming state by entering a ball.

  First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) is a first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B) and a first in the third embodiment. It is an example of a main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The difference from the present embodiment is that the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is lowered, and a short open jackpot and a long open jackpot are provided as the jackpot. Here, the short open big hit, the second special winning opening C20 in a short time (for example, 0.1 in the distribution game execution round (round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened) during the big hit. It is a big hit that only opens), and the long open big hit means that the second big winning opening C20 is a long time in the sorting game execution round (the second big winning opening C20 is open) during the big hit. It is a jackpot that can be opened (for example, 30 seconds). Incidentally, in the third embodiment, by the game ball entering the specific area C22 during the distribution game execution round described above, a game property that shifts to the probability varying game state after the end of the special game being executed. Has become (so-called ball-making machine).

  Next, FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 (main game table 3) are an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from the present embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to when the game is lost and the time is shortened, and the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is "0". And "1 to 3" have different table contents. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time reduction game state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are long variations, Depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbol is short variation or long variation, the method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbol (particularly the first decorative symbol) is configured to be different (details will be described later). . In the time shortening game state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (to advance the game by right-handing, only the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed, Or, the change of the second main game symbol is more likely to be executed than the change of the first main game symbol).

  Also, as will be described later in detail, in the time-reduced game state, the variation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the variation time of the second main game symbol, so in the time-reduced game state The variation time of the two decorative symbols will also be determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of symbol variation (may differ depending on the number of reservations).

  Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time shortening game state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (because the game is right-handed, the second main Only the symbol variation on the game side is executed), since the first main game hold basically does not occur, the variation mode determination table contents related to the first main game symbol in the time shortened gaming state is In the case of a short hit (for example, 3 seconds), only one type of change time may be included, and in the case of a big hit, the change time of a long time (for example, 30 seconds) may be only one type (time. The symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the shortened game state is an irregular symbol variation, so there is no problem even if the variation mode determination table content is simple.) In addition, in order to cause the second main game hold during irregular symbol fluctuation, the variation mode determination table contents relating to the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortening game state, regardless of the number of holds, a short time. The variation mode may be selected (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of holdings shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game holding and the second main game holding, but the first main in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A. It is the game holding number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, the second main game holding number.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the probability variation game state by the number of times of variation of the main game symbol (in non-stochastic variation game state). It is to move). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. If Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in a step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in a step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game shortened flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game shortened flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. Even if No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process proceeds to step 1470. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state ends by the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c becoming 0 (so-called, ST). Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the probability variation game state is configured not to end depending on the number of symbol variations (it can be terminated when the special game is won), and a big hit for the first main game. Even if the jackpot related to the second main game has a higher proportion than the jackpot related to the long open jackpot, the jackpot related to the second main game also has a short open jackpot. Good.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third) and step 1650 (third), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in step 1608, or If the special game execution flag is ON in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the round currently being executed is the sorting game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, 2R / 4R). If Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a distribution game execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process moves to step 1612. Also, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and then The process moves to the process (process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, the process moves to step 1716. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is the long open symbol (7A / 4B. It is 5B and 7B, and the second main game jackpot symbols are all long open symbols). If Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 has a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22, An opening pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is substantially deterministic is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710. In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36, as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22, a short opening pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 seconds). Then, an open pattern designed so that non-ball entry into the specific area C22 is substantially deterministic is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710.

  Next, in step 1710, the sorting game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1712, the sorting game execution control means MP36 turns on the sorting game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

  Next, in step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1716, the process moves to step 1720. On the other hand, if No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1718, the process moves to step 1720. Next, in step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1724, in step 1726 the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability variation transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. . Even if No in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. Next, in step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 increments the round number counter by 1 (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1634). Even if No in step 1718, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in a step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets a certain number of times (200 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in a step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) in the time saving number counter MP52c in step 1670, and proceeds to step 1672.

  Next, in a step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game shortened flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in a step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third), that is, after executing the decorative symbol display content determination process described above in step 2200, step 2010 (third). Then, the sub control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300, and if No, in step 2850 (third), the sub-control board S performs a time saving medium decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. It executes and shifts to step 2400.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2230 (third), The drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time-reduced game state. If Yes at step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206, and if No, at step 2800 (third), the drawing display content determination means SM21n causes the time-saving / medium-first device to be described later. The figure content determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2208. The process of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (the symbol content determination flag does not exist). In the third embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and the effective line (the line that becomes effective by arranging the same numerical symbols) is 1. It is a line, and it means a big hit if the same numeric symbols are aligned on the relevant active line (inversely, if the same numeric symbols are not aligned on the relevant active line, it is lost). In the left column, the middle column, and the right column (or in the middle column), only the numerical symbols can be stopped (temporary stop) (the aforementioned "special symbol" does not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely high). It has a low probability), and can be temporarily stopped in the middle of a symbol change (or, the probability of temporary stop is extremely low). In addition, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns of a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and an effective line (a line in which it is effective to arrange the same symbols) is one line and is the same as the effective line. It means a big hit if the numerical figures are aligned (on the contrary, if the same numerical figures are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). In the left column, the middle column, and the right column (or in the middle column), only the numerical symbols can be stopped (temporary stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop), and during the symbol fluctuation. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the time saving medium first packaging content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) of FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2802, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the packaging display content determination means SM21n causes the second main game suspension content (particularly, the winning / failing result and the variation time) relating to the symbol variation (variation of the main gaming symbol), and Confirm the second main game hold content (especially the variation time), which is the order of digestion up to the first and second pieces, that is, the second main game hold content (especially the winning / failing result and the variation time) excluding the third hold. . Next, in step 2806, the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n determines whether or not there is a hold (including the symbol change) which is a change time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more related to the confirmed hold, , Based on the order in which the holding time (including the symbol variation) becomes a variation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more, referring to the table for determining the first variation pattern of the time saving during the time saving, the first decorative symbol The variation mode is determined.

  Here, the right side of the drawing is an example of the table for determining the first time variation diagram of time saving / medium time in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (timing of step 2806), the second main game hold number, the second main game symbol fluctuation and the second main symbol The variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the variation time related to the game suspension. As described above, in the variation mode of the second main game symbol, "b0 (1 second)" is short variation, and other than "b0 (1 second)" is long variation.

  Specifically, when there are two or more second main game holds, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that is a long change in the symbol fluctuation, the first hold, and the second hold. , If there is no hold that is a long variation, the variation time of the 3 variations of the second main game symbol becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, the variation time when the second main game hold is 3 and the second main game hold number is "1 to 3" is "the relevant change: 1 second, the first: 1 second, 2 pieces. In the case of "eye: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game holding number is "1 to 3" is "the variation" and " It becomes a total of 3 seconds of the "first item" and the "second item", and the first decorative symbol will also be stopped at the same time (or approximately the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol relating to the second hold. . The second decorative symbol is configured to stop at the same time (or approximately the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol in each change.

  On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game holds, and in any one of the symbol fluctuation, the first holding and the second holding, there is a long fluctuation, the first The variation time until the variation of the main game symbol relating to the suspension which is a long variation of the digestion order is the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the second main game hold is 3 and the second main game hold number is "1 to 3", the change time is "the change: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds, 2 pieces". In the case of "eye: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game holding number is "1 to 3" is "the variation" and " It becomes a total of 11 seconds with the "first item", and the first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or approximately the same time) as the variation stop of the main game symbol related to the first suspension which becomes a long variation.

  If the second main game hold is less than or equal to one, it is determined whether or not there is a long change hold until the last hold order (including the symbol change) is reached, and the long change When there is no hold that becomes, the variable time of the first decorative symbol is the total variation time of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol and all the suspensions. For example, when the second main game hold is 1, and the second main game hold number is "1 to 3", the variation time is "the relevant variation: 1 second, the first one: 1 second" The variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game holding number is "1 to 3" is 2 seconds, which is the total of "the variation" and "the 1st". At the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbol fluctuation stop related to the eye hold is stopped, the first decorative symbol will also be stopped.

  On the other hand, if the second main game hold is 1 or less, and if there is a long change hold until the last hold order (including the symbol change), the first hold order The variation time until the variation of the main game symbol relating to the suspension that becomes the long variation is the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the second main game hold is 1 and the variable time when the second main game hold number is "1 to 3" is "the relevant change: 1 second, the first: 10 seconds" The variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game holding number is "1 to 3", is 11 seconds which is the total of "the variation" and "the first", and is a long variation. At the same time (or substantially the same time) as the variation stop of the main game symbol relating to the first hold, the first decorative symbol will also be stopped.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, the timing after the hold digestion. At the timing, the second main game hold information may be confirmed, and the variation time of the first decorative symbol may be determined.

  Next, in step 2808, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the hold information confirmed in step 2804 and determines whether or not there is a big jackpot hold in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the big jackpot holding, and the step The process moves to 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2808, in step 2812, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be a lost symbol, and proceeds to step 2814. In the process of step 2812, the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol is reached according to the variation time of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbols in the left column and the right column are the same, for example, “4.6. 4 ”) or a staggered pattern (stop symbols in the left and right columns are not the same, for example,“ 4, 6 and 3 ”) may be determined. Next, in step 2814, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns on the time saving first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (step 2208). Process). Even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2208).

  Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time shortening game state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (because the game is right-handed, the second game is performed. Since only the symbol variation on the main game side is executed), the first main game hold basically does not occur, but the first main game hold occurs due to the player performing left-handing, etc. In this case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main game symbol until the variation related to the first main game suspension is completed.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a time saving medium decoration symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main game symbol has started. If Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2856, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if No in step 2852, the process moves to step 2858.

  Next, at step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2858, in step 2860, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts variable display of the first decorative symbol in step 2864, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2862, at step 2865, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2866.

  Next, in step 2866, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 variably displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image display such as temporary stop display, advance notice image display, reach image display, etc. related to the change of the main game symbol that has been determined. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be temporarily stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, but they are not temporarily stopped in a stop mode such as a "special symbol" or a pseudo continuous symbol. As a specific example of temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is a reach due to a pattern change that is a reach change for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more) (the left row and the right row temporarily stop. It may be configured to temporarily stop the second decorative symbol during the period) or may be configured to temporarily stop the first decorative symbol as a pseudo continuous variation before the first decorative symbol reaches the reach. .

  Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. If Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the temporary drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative symbol is reached. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the first decorative symbol. Next, in step 2876, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2872, at step 2878, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2880.

  Next, in step 2880, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2882, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400). Even if No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Here, the upper part of the figure is an image drawing of the variation of the decorative symbol during the reduction of working hours, and illustrates an example of the operation relating to the variation of the decorative symbol in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol variation start state" means that at the timing when the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) begins to vary, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) starts to vary. Is displayed. The shaded areas indicate that the decorative design (first decorative design) is changing. Further, at the timing when the main game symbol (especially, the second main game symbol) fluctuates, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) fluctuates. The shaded areas indicate that the decorative design (first decorative design) is changing. In this way, the second decorative symbol, at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the fluctuation of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol), start and stop the fluctuation (match with the fluctuation of the main game symbol). While the second decorative symbol is configured to start and stop changing every three changes of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol). That is, the first decorative design is configured such that one design fluctuation can be executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods of the main game design (and the second decorative design).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the hold quantity and the change time of the second main game hold, By configuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol to be the value of the variation time of the second main game symbol multiple times, the variation of the main game symbol multiple times is played as if it were one variation. It can be shown to the person, and in the case of a large number of times (200 times in this example) the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol, which is the ending condition of the probability variation game state, as in the third embodiment, a small number of times ( For example, it can be shown to the player as 100 times, and it is possible to alleviate the boring progress of the game due to continuous loss variation during the probability variation game state, and at the same time, probability variation game. The jackpot probability in the state is actually So that the can feel like the remote has risen.

  In the third embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be fixedly stopped three times during the period in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped once. However, the fixed stop count of the second decorative symbol is set. The maximum number of 3 times is a value smaller than the second main game hold upper limit number of 4 times (if the second main game hold upper limit number is exceeded, the first decorative symbol is changing. Therefore, there may be a situation where the second main game hold is exhausted).

  Note that the board surface configuration of the third embodiment may be changed, and for example, the game ball can almost certainly pass through the auxiliary game starting opening H10 and the second main game starting opening B10 when right-handing is executed. It is arranged so as to vertically overlap on the route (the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is arranged on the upper side when viewed from the player), and almost all the game balls flowing down the route and passing through the auxiliary game starting opening H10 are The second main game starting opening B10 may be configured so as to be able to enter the ball. In such a case, in the time shortening game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10 to when it enters the second main game starting port B10, "the auxiliary game symbol Since it is desirable that it can be changed start → change end of auxiliary game symbol → open second main game start port electric accessory B11d, "second change time of auxiliary game symbol, second main game start port electric It is preferable to set the opening mode of the accessory B11d to “open for 6 seconds → close”. Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, when the right hitting is executed in the time reduction game state, in order to prevent a large amount of game balls from entering the second main game starting opening B10, the second main game It is desirable that the number of prize balls of the starting opening B10 is 1 (the number of prize balls of the first main game starting opening A10 is 3).

  Incidentally, in the third embodiment, while confirming the second main game holding content while the first decorative symbol is stopped, it is configured to determine the variation time relating to the next variation of the first decorative symbol, the second If there is a hold that is a long variation of the main game symbol up to the second digestion order, it is configured to stop the first decorative symbol at the same time when the symbol variation related to the hold that is the long variation is stopped. Therefore, the change time of the first decorative pattern may not depend on the number of holdings at the start of the change of the first decorative pattern, and by the hold that occurs during the change of the first decorative pattern, the first of the next change The variation time of the decorative pattern is configured to be different.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game suspensions, and in any of the symbol variation and the first suspension and the second suspension, a long variation. When there is a hold that becomes, the change time until the change of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes the longest variation of the digestion order is configured to be the change time of the first decorative symbol, and, If there is no hold that is a long change in one of the symbol variation, the first hold and the second hold, the variation time of the three variations of the second main game symbol is the variation of the first decorative symbol. Although it is configured to be time, for example, the variation time when the second main game hold number is 3 and the second main game hold number is "1 to 3" In the case of "1st: 1 second, 2nd: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the second main game hold number is "1-3" The variation time of the first decorative pattern when held is planned to be 3 seconds, which is the total of "the variation", "the first" and "the second", but the second main game hold is "1 Without maintaining "3", for example, when the actual fluctuation time becomes "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 1 second, 2nd: 5 seconds", the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol The time is 7 seconds, which is the total of the “variation”, the “first item”, and the “second item”, and the variation time of the first decorative symbol may differ depending on the presence or absence of the additional holding occurrence.

  Incidentally, in the third embodiment, while confirming the second main game holding content while the first decorative symbol is stopped, it is configured to determine the variation time relating to the next variation of the first decorative symbol, When the effect related to the first decorative symbol may be determined during the stop, for example, when a "lightning effect" is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of fluctuation due to a certain first decorative symbol fluctuation. In, while the first decorative symbol fluctuation is stopped, confirm the subsequent fluctuation content of the second decorative symbol (or the fluctuation content of the second main game symbol), and in the next first decorative symbol fluctuation, "Lightning bolt" May be determined again. In addition, the more the “lightning production” continues, the higher the degree of expectation that a big hit will be due to the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the effect. It is desirable to configure it to be high. In addition, although the timing of confirming the change content of the second decorative symbol (or the change content of the second main game symbol) may be changed, when the change start timing of the first decorative symbol is confirmed, at the relevant timing In contrast to the fact that only the contents of the change relating to the second main game hold can be confirmed, when the change is confirmed at the change stop timing or the change end timing of the first decorative symbol, the first occurred in the period during the change of the first decorative symbol. Since it is possible to confirm the variation contents of the 2 main game hold, it is desirable that the confirmation timing is after the last stage of the variation of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, a detailed description has been given of a configuration in which two decorative designs, the first decorative design and the second decorative design, are displayed on the effect display device. It is not limited only to the configuration of form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in a gaming situation in which right-handing (a firing mode of launching a game ball toward the right side of the board) is to be executed, a right-handing instruction display indicating that right-handing should be executed The right-handed display control means SM27 for controlling the display control of is included.

  First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control board S in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when the execution of the repeating processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is started, step 3400 (fourth) is executed. The sub-control board S executes a right-handing instruction display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) of FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In this example, it is determined in step 3402 whether or not it is a time-reduced game state, but it is not limited to this, and whether or not it is a game state in which right-handing should be executed (for example, probability variation game). It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a state, whether or not it is a probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state, and the like). Note that if Yes in step 3402, the process moves to step 3406.

  In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right hit display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-hit display control means SM27 sets a command for displaying the right-hit instruction display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of the right-handing instruction display. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG so that the player can be informed that the right-handed game should proceed. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit the right hand, the right hitting instruction display is configured so that the priority of the display priority becomes higher (details will be described later). Note that the display that is basically displayed on the regular effect display device SG, such as the second decorative pattern and the hold display (including the first hold display and the second hold display), which will be described later, is the right-handing instruction display. You may comprise so that it may not overlap.

  The right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (such as during special game execution and during special game execution) is different. The display mode may be different depending on the state or the situation (for example, the size may be different). Further, when configured so that the display mode can be different, for example, during the big hit, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the opening mode of the special winning opening, for example, of the big winning opening The right-handing instruction display during a big hit, where all the opening modes are long open, has a relatively large first display pattern, and the right-handing instruction display during a big hit, where all the opening modes of the special winning opening are all short, is relatively small. The second display pattern is a right display instruction display during a big hit in which long opening and short opening are mixed as an opening mode of the special winning opening. The first display pattern is relatively large in a round in which the special winning opening is long opening. Therefore, in the round in which the big winning opening is short-opened, the right-handing instruction display may be switched to proceed so that the second display pattern becomes relatively small.

Further, in the case where the first right-handing instruction display having a relatively small display area and the second right-handing instruction display having a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handing instruction display, the following is performed. You may comprise.
(1) In a situation where right-handing is required (for example, in a time-saving game state), the first right-handing instruction display is configured to be displayed, and in the situation where right-handing is required, left-handing is played. When the machine detects (for example, in the time shortening game state, when three game balls enter the first main game start opening A10 that can enter by left hitting), the second right hitting instruction display Is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handing instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-handing instruction display is displayed near the four corners of the effect display device SG (for example, upper right), and the second right-handing instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Further, the display area for the first right-handing instruction display and the display area for the second right-handing instruction display do not overlap. The display area of the first right-handing instruction display and the display area of the second right-handing instruction display may be overlapped. In such a case, the display priority of the second right-handing instruction display is given. The display priority of the first right-handing instruction display may be higher than the display priority.
(3) From the highest display priority in the effect display device SG, "first right-handing instruction display → second right-handing instruction display → preliminary notice effect → decorating decorative pattern" is set ("second right-handing instruction"). “Instruction display → first right-handing instruction display → notification effect → decorating decorative pattern”), for example, when the display area of the second right-handing instruction display and the changing decorative symbol display area overlap. Displays the second right-handing instruction display on the front side (visible).
(4) The first right-handing instruction display may be overlapped with the first decorative pattern during the change in the auxiliary game state (during special symbol change (during first decorative symbol change, second decorative symbol change)). (For example, at the time of occurrence of "design expansion effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is expanded), the second decorative pattern does not overlap. However, the first right-handing instruction display does not overlap with either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol while the fluctuation is stopped. The first right-handing instruction display is a first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) and a second hold on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see FIG. 87, for example). Further, the first right-handing instruction display may overlap with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram of FIG. 83)}, but a specific notice effect {for example, a notice of a dialogue (a dialogue of a character Notice)} is not duplicated.
(5) The second right-handing instruction display may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol during a change in the auxiliary game state (during special symbol change (during first decorative symbol change, second decorative symbol change)). (For example, not only at the time of occurrence of the "design expansion effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged, but also during the scrolling change from top to bottom), It does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. The second right-handing instruction display is a first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) and a second hold on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see FIG. 87, for example). Further, the second right-handing instruction display includes a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example, a notice for dialogue (a notice for displaying the dialogue of the character)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative symbol is changing the special symbol (during the changing of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the first hold display of the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, 87) or a second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87). Furthermore, when the first decorative symbol is changing the special symbol (+ the first decorative symbol is changing), a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram of FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example, , Dialogue announcement (preliminary announcement displaying the dialogue of the character)}.
(7) When the second decorative symbol is changing the special symbol (while the first decorative symbol is changing and the second decorative symbol is changing), the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, (See FIG. 87) and the second main game side and the second main game side second hold display (see, for example, FIG. 87). Furthermore, when the second decorative symbol is in the process of changing the special symbol (+ while the second decorative symbol is changing), it may overlap with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram of FIG. 83)}, (For example, dialogue announcement (preliminary announcement of displaying the dialogue of the character)) does not overlap.
(8) The first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined notice effect {for example, group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a notice of dialogue (a notice of displaying a dialogue of a character)}.
(9) The second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined notice effect {for example, group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a notice of dialogue (a notice of displaying a dialogue of a character)}.

Further, in the case where the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the game state and the situation, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) While the small hit is being executed, the right hitting instruction display is in a relatively small display form (for example, one arrow), which is different from the display form when the small hit is not executed.
(2) Probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state when the special game is not being executed, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state when the special game is not being executed, and case where the special game is being executed There is a non-time reduction game state.
(3) The time-reduced game state has a non-stochastic variation game state and a time-reduced game state, and a probability variation game state and a time-reduced game state.
(4) When the special game is not being executed, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed in the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state On the other hand, while the special game is being executed, the right hitting instruction display is displayed (the display that prompts the left hitting is not displayed).
(5) In the time-saving game state, the right-handed instruction display is displayed (the display that prompts left-handed operation is not displayed).
(6) In the non-time-reduced game state, the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display described above can be displayed in either the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state. Although the display mode of the first right-handing instruction display is different between and the time reduction game state, the display mode of the second right-handing instruction display is the same.
(7) A display for prompting a left-handed strike is for a predetermined period (for example, a situation where a left-handed situation is changed from a situation where a right-handed situation is to be left, and a left-handed situation is a predetermined period, and an auxiliary game starting opening that is easy to enter when performing a right-handed situation Is displayed for a predetermined period from the detection of a right-hand hit such as when a game ball is entered into the game (it will be hidden after the predetermined period has elapsed), while the right-hand hit instruction display is in a situation where a right-hand hit is required. The period in which it is always displayed or the right-handed instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

  In the case of No in step 3404, in step 3408, the right-handing display control means SM27 sets a command for erasing the right-handing instruction display, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2100). Incidentally, in step 3408, if the right hitting instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

  Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to a display mode and a display position of a decorative pattern in the fourth embodiment. In the same drawing, by way of combination of the game state and the background effect, it is illustrated what kind of display mode and display position the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are. In addition, all four display examples shown in the same figure, the state that the decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) related to "7A" which is the jackpot pattern on the first main game side is stopped ing. First, in the upper left part of the figure, the case where the game state is the non-stochastic variation game state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is “777” and the arithmetic number, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is “777”, which is an arithmetic number, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal straight line. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the case where the game state is the probability variation game state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Chinese characters, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a convex shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is “777”, which is an arithmetic number, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "day stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" in both "777" and "7777". The display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both "777" and "777".

  Next, in the lower left part of the figure, the case where the game state is the non-stochastic variation game state and the background effect being executed is the "night stage" is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is “777”, which is an arithmetic number, and the display position has three numbers arranged in an oblique straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is “777”, which is an arithmetic number, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal straight line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, the case where the game state is the probability variation game state and the background effect being executed is the "night stage" is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is a Chinese numeral such as "7777", and the display position has three numbers arranged in a concave shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is “777”, which is an arithmetic number, and the display position has three numbers arranged in a horizontal straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "night stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" in both "777" and "7777". The display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both "777" and "777".

Thus, in the figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative pattern is different when the game state is different.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effects are different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the game state is different.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the game state is different.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects are different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the game state is different.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
It is configured like.

  Further, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the difference of the background effect and the game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is changed to a pattern such as numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 98 described later. When the display mode is formed by combining and, the display mode of the first decorative pattern may be changed by changing the design (the numbers may be divided into Chinese numerals and arithmetic numerals). They may be different or the same). Further, the display mode may be different depending on whether or not the pattern is attached. Also, as a structure that can suggest the game state after the big hit when the big hit by the display color of the number of the decorative pattern, the big hit was started by aligning three numbers whose display color is green. In that case, it is not certain whether or not the probability variation game state will be entered after the big hit ends, while if the big hit is started by aligning three numbers whose display color is red, after the big hit ends The probability variation game state may be configured to be almost deterministic. For example, in the non-stochastic variation game state, "3" is green and "7" is red, while in the probability variation game state. May be configured such that "3" and "7" are red ("3" has the same property as "7" in the probability variation game state). Further, as a difference between the properties of green and red, when the big hit is started due to the stop of the green decorative pattern, the big hit of 8 rounds (or 8 rounds or more) is started. Therefore, when the big hit is started because the red decorative pattern is stopped, the big hit of 16 rounds may be started, or the green decorative pattern is the reach. In this case, while the proportion of the design variation that is a big hit is 10%, when the red decorative design is reach, the proportion of the design variation that is a big hit may be 50%. Good. In addition, when the reach is "1", the percentage of the symbol variation that is a big hit is 10%, while when the reach is "7", the percentage that the symbol variation is a big jackpot is It may be configured to be 50%. Further, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the difference of the background effect and the game state, the display mode may be varied depending on whether or not a letter is attached to the number of the first decorative symbol. May be configured, for example, in the non-stochastic variation game state "7" of the first decorative symbol is not accompanied by the letters "SUPER", while in the probability variation game state "7" of the first decorative symbol The characters "SUPER" may be attached to "". Also, in the big hit in the first main game symbol (especially during the non-time shortening game state), the character "SUPER" is not attached to "7", and the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially during the time shortening game state) ), The character of "SUPER" is attached to "7", or the character of "SUPER" is attached to "7" in the big hit in the first main game symbol (especially during the non-time reduction game state) The probability that the character "SUPER" is attached to "7" in the big hit in the second main game symbol (particularly during the time shortening game state) may be increased. Furthermore, when the character of "SUPER" is attached, the jackpot of 16R is confirmed (the structure which confirms the 16R probability variation is acceptable), but when the character of "SUPER" is not attached, the jackpot of 16R is hit. May be determined (a configuration in which the 16R probability variation hit is not determined) may be determined or a 4R big hit may be determined. It should be noted that the character "SUPER" may be attached to the first decorative design, but the character "SUPER" is not necessarily attached to the second decorative design. Further, the first decorative symbols other than "7" (particularly, even-numbered symbols) have a configuration in which the letters "SUPER" are not attached even if they are the first decorative symbols.

  Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of the decorative pattern in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the area where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG is illustrated. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left part of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed around the central portion of the display area SG10, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed around the upper left portion of the display area SG10. Is configured. As the range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative pattern considering the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the big hit can be displayed, the second decorative pattern is the range as shown in the upper right part of the figure, and the first decorative pattern. Is the range shown in the lower right of the drawing. As illustrated, in the fourth embodiment, the area in which the first decorative symbol can be displayed is larger than the area in which the second decorative symbol can be displayed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the display of the second decorative symbol does not move during variable display, while the display of the first decorative symbol moves during variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10). Therefore, the moving range of the first decorative design is larger than the moving range of the second decorative design.

  Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to a variable display period of a decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the 1st decorative design and the 2nd decorative design and display when SP reach production is executed are illustrated. First, in the upper left part of the figure, since the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in reach display. Next, in the lower left part of the figure, a battle effect is executed as SP reach effect, and during the execution of the battle effect, the player wants to pay attention to the battle effect (whether the result of the battle effect is a big hit or not). The display of the first decorative pattern is deleted (not displayed). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern is continuously displayed as the reach display, and when the player wants to confirm the state of the decorative pattern during the battle production, the reach is displayed by visually recognizing the display of the second decorative pattern. You can recognize that you are inside. After that, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. In this way, while the main game symbol is changing, the display of the first decorative symbol is erased (while the battle effect is being executed), while the display of the second decorative symbol is constantly displayed, the first decorative symbol. The display period of the second decorative symbol is relatively longer than the display period of the symbol. In addition, even when the first decorative design is reach display, the second decorative design may not be reach display. Further, even when the first decorative symbol is performing the pseudo continuous variation described above, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to perform the pseudo continuous variation. Further, the second decorative design may not always be displayed, for example, the second decorative design may be hidden while the first decorative design is displayed, or the display area SG10 may be covered as a specific effect. When such an effect with a large display area is executed, the second decorative pattern may be hidden (difficult to see).

  Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to a decorative pattern to be used in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that in the figure, a configuration relating to a display mode of a decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol ends, the big hit symbol “7A” is stopped as a stop symbol of the first main game symbol, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the big symbol symbol. It will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic numeral which is a symbol common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. In addition, as the second decorative symbol, the arithmetic numeral is used when the first main game symbol is changed, and when "7A" is stopped, "777" is stopped.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol ends, the big hit symbol "7B" is stopped as a stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the big hit symbol. It will be displayed. In addition, "777" is stopped in the first decorative design. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the alphabet is used when the second main game symbol is changed and "AAA" is stopped when "7B" is stopped. Thus, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes are the same (the display area of the symbol and the design of the symbol). Are the same, the player cannot distinguish the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the fluctuation of the second main game symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes (the design of the variable display and the stop display is different) is doing). The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be displayed on the same display device or different display devices. Further, as will be described later, the first hold display and the second hold display may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. When displaying on different display devices both in the decorative pattern and the hold display, any of the display devices may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices) or a liquid crystal display. It may be a device and an LED lamp.

  Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram related to a stop display mode of a decorative pattern in the fourth embodiment. Note that, in the same figure, as in FIG. 80, a configuration relating to a display mode of a decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol ends, the big hit symbol “7A” is stopped as a stop symbol of the first main game symbol, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the big symbol symbol. It will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic numeral which is a symbol common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. In addition, the second decorative pattern uses arithmetic numbers, and "777" is stopped.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing at a different timing from the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is finished, and the big hit symbol "7A" (the same big hit symbol as the upper row in the figure) is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and The second decorative design will be stopped and displayed as a big hit design. Incidentally, the arithmetic number "333" is stopped in the first decorative pattern, and the arithmetic number "777" is stopped in the second decorative pattern. In this way, the first decorative symbol has a plurality of types of stop display modes (such as "777" and "333") even when the main game symbol has the same stop symbol, while the second decorative symbol is If the main game symbols have the same stop symbol, only one type of stop display mode (“777”) exists. In addition, as a specific example of the candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, first, the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern is a case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a jackpot of 16R. Are "333" and "777", which are "111" and "555" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit of 8R (or 8R or more), and 4R (or 4R or more). In the case of the stop display mode that suggests that it is a big hit, it is "222", "444", "666", and "888". Further, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "333" in the case of the stop display mode indicating that it is a 16R big hit, and the stop indicating that it is a 8R (or 8R or more) big hit In the case of the display mode, only "111" is displayed, and in the case of the stop display mode, which indicates that the jackpot is 4R (or 4R or more), only "222" is displayed. In addition, as another specific example, a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol suggesting that the probability variation game state is to be entered after the jackpot is over (it is almost definite to transition to the probability variation game state) , “111”, “333”, “555”, and “777”, and do not indicate that the probability change game state is entered after the jackpot is over (it is not definite that the probability change game state is entered). The candidates for the stop display mode of the decorative pattern are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, the candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol which indicates that the probability variation game state is to be entered after the jackpot is over (it is almost definite to enter the probability variation game state) is only "111". , The candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not indicate that the probability variation game state is to be transitioned to after the jackpot (it is not definite to transition to the probability variation game state) is only "222".

  Next, FIG. 82 is an example of the display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, and those with high display priority are shown in the upper stage and those with low display priority are shown in the lower stage. In addition, when the display content having a high display priority and the display content having a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right hitting instruction display and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner. For the display of the overlapping part, the right-handing instruction display with high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative pattern with low display priority Is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (hidden in the display of the right-handing instruction display and invisible). In this example, the display priority is high, and is “error display → right hitting instruction display → power saving display → second decorative symbol → notification effect → first decorative symbol → holding display”. Although the display priority may be changed, the display priority is changed for "error display", "right-hand instruction display", and "power saving display" because it has a great influence on the profit of the player. Is not desirable. In addition, the order of display priority may be exchanged between the notice effect, the first decorative pattern, and the hold display, but the display priority of the notice effect, the first decorative pattern, and the hold display is the display of the second decorative pattern. It is preferable that the priority is lower than the priority. The "right-handing instruction display" is preferably displayed at a position not hidden by other display objects (including the accessory YK etc.), and the display content having a higher priority than the "right-handing instruction display" is newly added. In the case where it is provided, it is preferable that the newly provided area in which the display content is displayed does not overlap with the area in which the “right hitting instruction display” is displayed. Further, the "power saving display" is configured not to be displayed while the symbol variation is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in this figure, the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated, and the configuration is different from that in FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the second main game symbol is changing, and under the situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being variably displayed, the right-handing instruction display is displayed (the game state is It is in a time shortening game state, and in the time shortening game state, it is a game property that progresses the game by hitting the right side). After that, the area in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed overlaps with the area in which the right-handing instruction display is displayed, and the right-handing instruction display has a higher priority, so that it is displayed in the front. In addition, the second decorative design and the right-handed instruction display are configured so that the display areas do not overlap.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the flock of sheep appears as a notice effect under the situation where the second main game symbol is changing and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. In the notice production, the display area overlaps with both the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and the priority is "second decorative design> notice production> first decorative design", so the display of sheep When the display of sheep and the first decorative pattern overlap, the display of the sheep is displayed on the front, and when the display of the sheep and the second decorative design overlap, the second decorative design is displayed on the front. Become. Incidentally, as in a modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment described later, when there are a plurality of hold display areas on the effect display device SG (hold display on the first main game side and hold on the second main game side) Display, the first hold display and the second hold display, etc.), a hold display area SG10 is newly provided in the lower left part of the display area SG10 in FIG. The right-handed instruction display and the display area SG10 do not overlap with each other, such as the first hold display and the newly provided hold display as the second hold display). Good.

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which two decorative designs, the first decorative design and the second decorative design, are displayed on the effect display device SG. By configuring so that the second decorative pattern is displayed even when the first decorative pattern is deleted, the user-friendly gaming machine can be confirmed even when the player wants to check the state of the decorative pattern. In addition to the above, by deleting the display of the first decorative pattern even when the player wants to show the effect such as SP reach effect, the effect desired to be shown can be made more conspicuous. In addition, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative symbol to be higher than that of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol can be used in a situation where it is desired to check the situation of the decorative symbol when the first decorative symbol is not displayed. It can be configured so that the situation in which it becomes invisible is unlikely to occur.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative symbol may be displayed as a combination of three symbols, while the second decorative symbol may be displayed as one symbol. Further, there are four types of stop display modes for one symbol in the first decorative symbol, two types of stop display modes for one symbol in the second decorative symbol, and so on for one symbol of the first decorative symbol. The number of types of display modes may be larger than the number of types of stop display modes for one symbol of the second decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol (the display mode of the combination of the three symbols) is the same as the second decorative symbol rather than the probability of being the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol variations. The stop display mode can be configured to have a higher probability of being continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol variations. Further, as the display area of the second decorative symbol, two display areas of "○" and "x" are provided, and "○" is lit when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) design. It may be configured to display, and when the symbol variation is lost, "x" may be lit and displayed. In the case of such a configuration, the display of the second decorative symbol does not move on the display area SG10, and "○" or "x" blinks to notify that the symbol is changing. It may be configured as follows. Further, as the display area of the second decorative symbol, two display areas, that is, an area having a shape of "○" and an area having a shape of "☆" are provided, and when the first main game symbol changes, the shape of "○" The variable display and the stop display are executed in the area of, and when the second main game symbol is changed, the variable display and the stop display are executed in the area of the shape of "☆", and "○" or "☆" informs you that the symbol is changing by blinking, and when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) design, "○" or "☆" is lit up and displayed. When the variation is stopped and displayed as a lost design, "○" or "☆" may be configured to be turned off and displayed, and in such a case, in the first decorative design, the first main pattern The design used when the game pattern changes and the design used when the second main game design changes It becomes one (the display area of the symbol and the design of the symbol are the same, and the player cannot easily distinguish the fluctuation of the first main gaming symbol and the fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. And may be configured as, for example, “777”). In the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes are different (variable display and stop display areas are different. Yes, the design of the variable display and stop display is different). Further, as described above, in the case where two display areas of the area of “◯” and the area of “☆” are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, the first main game symbol is When the big hit (or small hit) symbol is stopped and displayed, "○" is lit, and when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit (or small hit) symbol, "☆" is displayed. Illuminate and display "○" when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, and turn off "○" when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol It is configured to turn off the display, and as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, if the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) symbol, "333" It is possible to stop and display in a plurality of types of stop display modes such as "" and "777". When the handle or the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed in loss pattern, at a plurality of types of stop display mode such as "326" and "761" may be configured to be stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, the number of types of the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is stopped when the main game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is a big hit (or a small hit). There is only one kind of stop display mode, and when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost, there is only one type of stop display symbol that can be stopped, while the first decoration The number of types of stop display mode of the symbols is a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) becomes a big hit (or a small hit), and the main There are multiple types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is lost.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, a detailed description has been given of a configuration in which two decorative designs, the first decorative design and the second decorative design, are displayed on the effect display device. It is not limited only to the configuration of form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modified example 1 from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2200, the sub-control board S executes the decorative pattern display content determination processing, and then step 3500 (fourth variation). In 1), the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (fourth modification 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth modification 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 suspends. After temporarily storing the information in the holding information temporary storage area, in step 2116, the design drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, or in step 2111, the design drawing hold information display control means SM22. When the symbol variation display start instruction command is not received from the main side, in step 2118-1 (4th variation 1), the design suspension information display control means SM22 displays the design suspension counter value as the first suspension display. And the same number of hold images (lamp-shaped hold display on the effect display device SG) are lit and displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (fourth variable 1), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 numerically displays the drawing reservation counter value as a second hold display on the effect display device SG. The process moves to the process (process of step 2200). The display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking of LED lamps different from the display on the effect display device SG, etc. The hold display and the second hold display may be different.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth variation 1) of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the packaging variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. Even if No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

  Next, in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the diagram related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , And proceeds to step 3526.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3514, at step 3518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Then, the process proceeds to step 3526.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3518, at step 3522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) causes the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the notice effect display control unit SM24 (and the reach effect display control unit SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process of step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3526. Even if No in step 3522, the process moves to step 3526.

  Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board M side to the main game). It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol (sends to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 3530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2400). To do. Even if No in step 3510 or step 3526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of holdings is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is stopped and displayed. After that, the hold on the first main game side is exhausted and the next symbol variation starts, so that the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side change. (The display indicating that the number of holdings on the first main game side is two is changed to the display indicating that the number is one). After that, with the same symbol variation, a hold on the first main game side occurs (a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10), and the number of reserves on the first main game side changes, The 1st hold display on the 1st main game side and the 2nd hold display on the 1st main game side change (change from the display that the number of the hold on the 1st main game side is 1 to the display that it is 2) Will be). In this way, the first hold display and the second hold display are the display mode at the hold digestion timing when the symbol variation starts and the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game starting opening. Is configured to change.

  Next, in the left middle row, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of holdings is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Also, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side is variably displayed. Then, during the same change, a hold change effect (effect in which the display mode of the hold can be changed) is executed as the hold prefetching effect. In addition, as the effect mode of the hold change effect shown in the figure, it is an effect aimed at the hold on the first main game side, and whether the display mode of the first hold display changes due to the flame on the first hold display. It is a production that fuels whether or not. After that, as a result of the hold change effect, the first hold display on the first main game side changes, while the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. In this way, when the hold prefetching effect is executed, the hold display can be changed only in the first hold display, and the second hold display is not changed. Even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side may change, while the second hold display on the second main game side is changed. It is configured to remain unchanged. It should be noted that the reservation prefetching effect is executed by the processing exemplified in the above-described second embodiment and the like.

As shown in the figure, the features of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows:
(1) When the number of holdings is the same, the display form of the first holding display may change, while the display form of the second holding display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first hold display can change without the increase or decrease of the hold number (digestion of hold or occurrence of hold), while the display mode of the second hold display does not change without increase or decrease of the hold number.
(3) When an action is executed as a hold change effect on the display related to the hold and the effect in which the display mode of the hold is changed is executed, the hold display that is the target of the effect is the first hold display, The hold change effect is not executed for the second hold display.
It is configured as described above.

  Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the same drawing, regarding the presence or absence of the display and the display mode of the first hold display and the second hold display in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state, which are applicable in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, The structural example is shown in figure. First, in << Example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are configured to be displayed in both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state, The display mode of the first hold display is different between the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state (the first hold display relating to the first main game side and the first hold display relating to the second main game side. Both are different). Incidentally, in << Example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side, the first hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side, and the first main game side The second hold display corresponding to the hold and the second hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side are respectively displayed, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side, Neither the first hold display (the area where the first hold display is displayed) nor the second hold display (the area where the second hold display is displayed) is shared.

  Next, in << Example 2 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time shortening game state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Further, in the time shortening game state, a first hold display on the second main game side, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the right hitting is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start opening B10), and the game progresses. In the case of a pachinko game machine (especially in the case of a game machine in which the second main game side hold is given priority over the first main game side hold), the first main game side hold is the player. Since it is not so important to the first main game side, the first hold display may be hidden. Further, even in such a configuration, if it is configured so that the player cannot recognize the number of holdings on the first main game side, the second holding display on the first main game side is displayed because it is not user-friendly. Is configured.

Next, in << Example 3 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time shortening game state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Further, in the time shortening game state, a first hold display on the second main game side, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the right hitting is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start opening B10), and the game progresses. In the case of a pachinko game machine (especially in the case of a game machine in which the second main game side hold is given priority over the first main game side hold), the first main game side hold is the player. Since it is not so important to the first main game side, the first hold display may be hidden. Also, in the non-time shortened game state, left-handed execution is performed, and the first main game symbol is changed (by inserting the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10) to advance the game. In the case of a pachinko game machine (especially, when the second main game start opening B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that has left-handed), the second main game side hold is not so important to the player. The first hold display on the second main game side may be hidden. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number held on the first main game side or the number held on the second main game side. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are always displayed. In the figure, the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state are different in the configuration relating to the presence or absence of the hold display, but the present invention is not limited to this and the non-probability variation game state and the probability variation The configuration relating to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different depending on the game state, or the configuration relating to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different due to the difference of the effect mode. In addition, since the display mode of the first hold display is different due to the different game states shown in << Example 1 >>, the display mode of the second hold display is not different. It is also applicable to the configuration of 3 >>. As described above, as shown in << Example 1 >><< Example 2 >><< Example 3 >>,
(1) When the game state is different (for example, in the non-time shortened game state and the time shortened game state, in the non-probability variation game state and the probability variation game state, or in accordance with the type of the limited frequency state) The display mode of the first hold display is different, but the display mode of the second hold display is the same.
(2) When the effect modes are different (for example, the daytime stage of FIG. 77 and the night stage of FIG. 77, or a predetermined effect stage indicating that the hold prefetch effect is being executed and a mode other than the predetermined effect stage) The display mode of the first hold display is different, but the display mode of the second hold display is the same, depending on which of the plurality of types of effect stages that can be manually switched).
(3) Different game states (for example, non-time-reduced game state and time-reduced game state, non-probability variation game state and probability variation game state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , The display of the first hold display is different, but the second hold display is always displayed regardless of the game state (however, such as the special game state and error state has priority over the hold display. In the state in which there is information to be displayed as a result, neither the first hold display nor the second hold display may be displayed).
(4) If the effect modes are different (for example, the daytime stage of FIG. 77 and the night stage of FIG. 77, or a predetermined effect stage indicating that the hold prefetch effect is being executed and a mode other than the predetermined effect stage) , Or according to any one of a plurality of types of production stages that can be switched manually), the presence or absence of the display of the first hold display is different, but the second hold display regardless of the effect mode. Is always displayed (However, in the display mode that has information that should be displayed with priority over the hold display such as the demo screen display and error display, it is assumed that neither the first hold display nor the second hold display is displayed. Good).
It has such characteristics. In addition, the above-mentioned characteristics are characteristics that can be applied to both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold.

  Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram related to the deletion of the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Further, the number of holdings is two on the first main game side and zero on the second main game side. Also, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side is variably displayed. After that, the decorative pattern is reach-displayed with the same change, and then the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect with the same change. While the battle effect is being executed, the first hold display is erased (non-displayed) on both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second hold display is displayed on the first main game side. Both displays on the second main game side are continuously displayed. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the variation of the symbol being executed is a big hit. The first hold display is erased in order to occupy (use most of the display area SG10) to execute the battle effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, if it is configured so that the player cannot recognize the number of holdings on the first main game side or the number of holdings on the second main game side, it is not user-friendly, so the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are always displayed. In the figure, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden when the SP reach is executed, but the second hold display is not displayed. The hold display (the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is shown as being displayed, but it is not limited to this, and it is a big hit (partially , Or always), the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (first The 1st main game side second hold display and the 2nd main game side second hold display) may be configured to remain displayed. In addition, at the time of execution of SP reach, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (first The configuration in which the second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side remain displayed may be always applied during the execution period of SP reach, or during the execution period of SP reach. It may be applied to some periods.

  With the configuration described above, according to the gaming machine of the first modification from the fourth embodiment, two hold displays, that is, the first hold display and the second hold display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first hold display, the display mode is changed to suggest a jackpot expectation degree related to the hold, or when the player wants the SP reach effect to pay attention to the player, the display is erased. Amusement of the game can be enhanced by using the display mode (display or non-display) according to the situation and by using it as a part of the effect suggesting a big hit or the like. Further, in the second hold display, by always displaying and not changing the display mode, when the player wants to confirm the current hold number, the hold number can be recognized without causing any doubt. Is configured.

  It should be noted that the modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment may be configured to display the pending digestion transmission image as exemplified in the modification example 3 from the second embodiment. With such a configuration, the hold digestion transfer image corresponding to the first hold display may be displayed, and the hold digest transfer image corresponding to the second hold display may not be displayed. Note that the hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode in which the first hold display and the hold display mode are the same or similar, and for example, the first hold display is a display with a shape of “◯”. When the display color is displayed in any one of the display colors of “red”, “green”, “blue”, and “white”, the held digestion transfer image corresponding to the first held display is also “○”. It is possible to exemplify a configuration in which the display is in the shape of “” and is displayed in any one of the display colors “red”, “green”, “blue”, and “white” as the display color. The display mode of the first hold display immediately before the main game side hold corresponding to the first hold display and the display state immediately after the main game side hold corresponding to the first hold display are displayed are displayed. The display mode of the retained digestion transmission image may be the same display.

In addition, when configured to display the held digestion transmission image, the following configuration may be adopted. Note that only one of the following configurations may be adopted, or a plurality of components may be combined. In addition, one or a plurality of configurations of the configuration adopting only one or a combination of a plurality of components and the configuration of << Example 1 >>, << Example 2 >>, or << Example 3 >> in FIG. 88 described above. And may be combined.
(1) In the non-time-reduced game state, the hold digestion transfer image of the first main game side can be displayed, but the hold digestion transfer image of the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time reduction game state, both the hold digestion transmission image on the first main game side and the hold digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(3) In the time shortening game state, the held digestion transfer image of the second main game side can be displayed, but the held digestion transfer image of the first main game side is not displayed.
(4) In the time-saving game state, both the hold digestion transmission image of the first main game side and the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side can be displayed.
(5) The hold digestion transmission image can be displayed in the non-time reduction game state, but the hold digestion transmission image is not displayed in the time reduction game state.
(6) The ratio of displaying the hold digestion transfer image in the time shortening game state is higher than the ratio of displaying the hold digestion transfer image in the non-time shortening game state (for example, the first main game in the non-time shortening game state). (Always display the held digestion transmission image on the side)
(7) The hold digestion transmission image on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state can change the display mode during symbol change.
(8) The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state does not change during the symbol change (when configured so that the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side can be displayed).
(9) The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the time shortening game state can be changed during the symbol change. However, the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side in the non-time reduction game state changes during the symbol variation than the rate at which the hold digestion transmission image of the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state changes during the symbol variation. The rate of doing is lower.
(10) The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image of the first main game side in the time shortening game state does not change during the symbol change (when configured so that the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side can be displayed).
(11) Unlike the above-described hold display having two hold displays such as the first hold display and the second hold display, the hold hold digestion transfer image has the first hold digestion transfer image and the second hold digestion transfer image. It does not have two retained digestive transfer images such as images, but has only one retained digestive transfer image.
(12) During SP reach and the like, the first hold display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the hold digestion transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. Further, in the above, although the configuration relating to the display of the holding digestion transmission image in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state is described, the "non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state in the above configuration "," A non-stochastic variation game state and a probability variation game state "may be applied to the configuration, or may be applied to the" production mode A and production mode B ".

(Fifth Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the two display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design can be displayed on the effect display device SG as the display of the decorative design corresponding to one main game design. The configuration for simultaneously displaying two decorative symbols on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG different from the above-described configuration will be described as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. As a difference from the second embodiment, a distribution starting port unit C50 having a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10 is provided. Although the details of the distribution starting port unit C50 will be described later, as shown in the figure, the distribution starting port unit C50 is provided with a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either one of the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down to the vicinity of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11hd attached to the distribution starting opening unit C50. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11hd is configured to be easily opened when the auxiliary game time saving flag is ON, so that the time reduction game state (the auxiliary game time saving flag is When right hitting is performed when it is ON, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11hd is opened and the game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10 (second main game). The game ball that has entered the distribution starter unit C50 from the vicinity of the starting mouth electric accessory B11hd is difficult to enter the first main game starting mouth A10, and is easily configured to enter the second main game starting mouth B10. ing).

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, as the configuration of the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG, the second decorative symbol display area SG14, which is an area in which the second decorative symbol can be variably displayed, and the first decorative symbol are variably displayed. With a first decorative symbol display area SG15 which is an area to be obtained, a common hold display section SG16 which displays both the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side, and a display relating to the held hold And a holding passage route SG17 through which a certain holding digest display passes. In addition, an upper part of the effect display device SG is a movable movable accessory that is driven when an effect that encourages the player to perform a big hit such as SP reach effect is executed. YK is provided.

  Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operation diagram of a distribution start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start opening unit C50 is a common entrance C51 into which a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game that is provided below the common entrance C51 and flows down from the common entrance C51. A start-port distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left-right direction about a support shaft) that regularly distributes the balls to the left and right, and a start-port distribution member C50y are provided below the start distribution member C50y. Also provided is a first main game starting opening A10 and a second main game starting opening B10 provided below the starting opening distributing member C50y. The distribution starter unit C50 configured as described above tilts the game ball, which has flown into the common entrance C51, to the left and right of the starter distribution member C50y as shown by the dotted line box in the figure. By this, it is configured to guide to either one of the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10. For example, the case where the starting mouth distributing member C50y is tilting leftward is defined as the "first position", and the case where the starting mouth distributing member C50y is tilting rightward is defined as "second position". In the case of "position", the game ball that has flown into the common ball entrance C51 is guided to the first main game starting port A10 side under the situation that the starting mouth distributing member C50y is in the "second position". While the starting mouth distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", while the starting mouth distribution member C50y is in the "first position", the game ball flowing into the common entrance C51 is the second main While being guided to the game starting opening B10 side, the starting opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". Then, in this example, the tilting movement of the starting mouth distribution member C50y in the left-right direction is configured to be performed by the weight of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the common ball inlet C51 is mechanically operated. , The game balls are alternately distributed to either one of the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 (1 game ball is distributed to either one and then to the other 1) It is designed with the intention of repeating the operation of distributing individual game balls). In the fifth embodiment, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed at the same time. Therefore, by having the distribution start opening unit C50. The holding of the first main game side and the holding of the second main game side can be caused substantially evenly, and can be changed at the same time as the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol frequently. Has been done.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the second main game side can be started even when the first main game side is changed, and the fluctuation of the first main game side is also changed when the second main game side is changed. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), and the first main game symbol is not changing (in the case of the processing of the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), And there is a hold of the main game symbol, and the condition is that the small hit game is not in progress. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when executing the process related to the first main game symbol, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is changing, but the first main game symbol is changing. If there is, the fluctuation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

  Next, at step 1407-2, the game content determination means MN reads out the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the holding information and shifts the remaining holding information (holding digestion). Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determination means MN executes the main game symbol winning / winning lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determination means MN determines a stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery, and temporarily stores these in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN, based on the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation mode random number) The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determination means MN is a command related to the information regarding the determined main game symbol and game state information (a command to the sub-control board S side, a symbol variation display start instruction command, etc.) Set. Next, in step 1407-8, the game content determination means MN, based on the variation mode, a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol, the first main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 (second main game Set to the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the game content determination means MN, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the part B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the game content determination means MN turns on the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-1, in step 1407-11, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process moves to step 1407-12.

  Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determination means MN, the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the game content determination means MN is the first (second) forced stop execution command (command to the sub side, and the first main game side is a big hit. In the case, the second main game symbol sends information to be forcibly stopped due to loss, and if the second main game side is a big hit, the command to send information for forcedly stopping due to loss of the first main game symbol) is set. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1407-16, the game content determination means MN, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The variation display of the main game symbol on the part B21g) is stopped by changing the stop symbol to a lost symbol, and the lost symbol is controlled to be displayed as a fixed stopped symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the changing second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbol is the big hit symbol. When stopped by the symbol, the changing first main game symbol is configured to be forcibly stopped due to a loss. Further, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, immediately before the forcible stop, a command for forcibly stopping the sub-control board S is configured. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

  Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determination means MN, the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation ends to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1407-18, the game content determination means MN turns off the first (second) changing flag and moves to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-19, in step 1407-20, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-19, the processing of step 1407-20 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 1450.

  Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes the above-described specific game end determination processing, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1500). Even when the result in Step 1407-11 or Step 1407-14 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1500).

  Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used when determining the variation mode of the main game table 3 and the second main game symbol used in determining the variation mode of the first main game symbol in the fifth embodiment. It is the main game table 3 that is played. Since the contents of the table are the same as those in the second embodiment, the description will be omitted. The effect contents corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbol will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control board S in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth), that is, the sub When the execution of (b) which is the repetitive processing routine of the main control unit SM is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a symbol standby display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100. Transition. In addition, after the sub-control board S executes the hold information management processing in step 2100, in step 2200 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes decorative pattern display content determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300. To do. In addition, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control processing in step 2300, in step 2350 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the second decorative symbol display control processing, which will be described later, The process moves to step 2400. In addition, after the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control processing in step 2400, the sub-control board S executes background effect control processing, which will be described later, in step 2500 (fifth). Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes an accessory driving control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and a standby preparation flag (both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed). Then, it is determined whether or not the flag that can be turned on) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 newly stops and displays both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). In the situation, the second decorative design is newly displayed as a stop display, or in the situation where the second decorative design is displayed as a new display, the first decorative design is newly displayed as a stop display) judge. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (increment timer, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. A timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start). Next, in step 2058, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. Even if No in step 2052, the process proceeds to step 2060.

  Next, in step 2060, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and the timer value is the standby execution value (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area is set in the standby state. This is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 20 seconds or more. If Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. The standby state ends when either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol starts the variable display. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of a decorative symbol display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, the first decorative design which is a decorative design corresponding to the first main game design, and the second decorative design corresponding to the second main game design. The decorative pattern and the decorative pattern can be variably displayed at the same time, and one of them is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub area. The main area is configured so that the displayable area is larger than the sub area. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern displayed in the main area is displayed with a picture and a number, and the decorative pattern displayed in the sub area is configured to be displayed with only a number (number). , The first decorative pattern is an arithmetic number and the second decorative pattern is a Chinese numeral). Further, as illustrated in the figure, under the situation where the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main area with a picture and a number, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. After 20 seconds have passed, the display of the first decorative pattern in the main area is configured to display only the pattern. The display of only this pattern is called a standby state. The main area and the sub area may be provided in the same liquid crystal (for example, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG) or may be provided in different devices. As a specific example provided in separate devices, for example, an effect display device A and an effect display device B are provided as effect display devices, the effect display device A has a main area, and the effect display device B is The display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A in such a case. Good. Further, the number of effect display devices and the number of display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) of decorative patterns may be three or more (first area, second area, third area, etc. are provided).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, in step 2066, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2100). .. Even if No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

  Next, FIG. 98 is a decorative symbol display mode image diagram in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern displayed in the main area is displayed with a picture and a number, and the decorative pattern displayed in the sub area is configured to be displayed with only a number. The display of numbers in the design is an arithmetic number, and the display of numbers in the second decorative design is Chinese characters. Further, the number of types of the first decorative design and the second decorative design is four each. In addition, as will be described later in detail, the display mode of the decorative symbol when there is a trigger hold, which is a hold related to the presence or absence of the execution of the prefetching effect, is the first sub area symbol table or the second sub area symbol table. Is configured to be determined with reference to, that is, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, and the display mode of the first decorative symbol when the trigger hold is present. And the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same.

  Next, FIG. 99 is the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, step 2128 (second), the mounting reservation information display control means. After SM22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines that the hold to be consumed this time is the hold relating to the first main game side. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the packaging reservation information display control means SM22 passes the main route (the hold display that is variably displayed in the main area in the hold passage route). The command is set to execute a hold digestion display (an effect that allows the player to recognize that the hold has been digested) that passes through the area, details of which will be described later), and proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2130 (fifth), at step 2132 (fifth), the packaging drawing information display control means SM22 determines whether the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not in the standby state. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the sub route (on the suspension passage route, the region through which the suspension display variably displayed in the sub region passes). Then, a command for executing the hold exhaustion display that passes through (details will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). If the answer is No in step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game side has the hold exhaustion display, or if the hold is exhausted in the standby state, in the case where the hold exhaustion display is executed in the main route, the standby is performed. When the hold on the second main game side is exhausted in a situation where it is not in a state, the reserve exhaustion display is executed on the sub route.

  Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a trigger suspension in the suspension. If Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the packaging pending information display control means SM22 executes a pending change display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S proceeds to step 2116 without executing the processing of step 3050 (fifth).

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the pending change display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the suspension digest is a suspension digest that passes through the first main route after the trigger suspension occurs. When Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger suspension is a jackpot. If Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the packaging pending information display control means SM22 refers to the pending change scenario determination table for big hit, and based on the trigger pending occurrence pending number, the pending change scenario (for trigger pending). Before such a symbol variation is started, a scenario for deciding how and at which timing the hold display mode related to the trigger hold changes will be determined.

  Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a loss are shown as a pending change scenario determination table. As shown in the figure, the pending change scenario relates to the trigger pending occurrence pending count (the number of pending holds that will be consumed before the trigger pending when the trigger pending occurs) and the trigger pending. It will be determined by the result of the change in the symbol. Further, "1 before change" is the hold display mode immediately before the trigger hold is exhausted, and the big hit expectation degree (when the trigger hold is a big hit) of the "1 change before" hold display mode. The ratio of the case of a big hit to the total of the case of a hit and a loss) is "rainbow-colored → red → blue" from the higher one. Also, the hold display mode is configured to be able to change with each symbol variation, but as the trigger hold is approaching, the hold display mode does not change or changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It is configured to go. That is, as the trigger hold is approaching, the hold display mode in which the jackpot expectation degree is low is not changed, and the player's expectation for the trigger hold is not impaired.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines the display color of the hold passage route by referring to the hold passage route display color determination table for the big hit, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2116). Further, in the case of No in step 3054, in step 3060, the packaging pending information display control means SM22 refers to the pending change scenario determination table for loss and determines a pending change scenario based on the trigger pending occurrence pending number. To do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines the display color of the suspension passage route by referring to the reservation passage route display color determination table for the case of losing, and the next process (process of step 2116) ). Even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2116).

  Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for big hit and a table for loss are shown as the reserved passage route display color determination tables. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passage route will be determined by the result of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. The iridescent expectation degree of the display color of the hold passage route (the ratio of the big hit to the total of the big hit and the miss when the trigger hold is large) is from the highest to "Rainbow → Red → Blue → No change" Has become. It should be noted that the hold passage route is configured to be determined only by the first hold digestion timing after the trigger hold occurs, but is not limited to this, and is configured so that it can be changed every time the trigger hold is digested. May be. When configured in this way, it is preferable that, as with the change in the hold display mode (hold change effect) described above, the display mode does not change to a display mode with low jackpot expectation as the trigger hold is approaching. . Further, regarding the change of the display mode of the hold display mode and the hold passing route display color, although it is not specifically shown at which timing in the pattern change, it is a notice effect at the start of the pattern change and during the pattern change. The display mode may be changed at various timings according to the performance to be executed, such as execution timing, hold occurrence time, hold digestion time, etc., and by doing so, the player is It is possible to have an expectation that the hold display mode or the hold passing route display color changes to a display mode in which the big hit expectation degree is high. In the fifth embodiment, the hold passage route display color, which is the display color of the hold passage route SG17, indicates the expectation of a big hit for the trigger hold (when the trigger hold becomes a big hit, the trigger hold becomes a failure. The display color of the holding passage route is more likely to change than that of the case, or the holding passage route display color is likely to be a display color with a high expectation for a big hit), but the present invention is not limited to this. Display, and has a display mode of the hold digestion transfer image, when configured to suggest a big hit expectation of the pattern variation related to the hold digestion transfer image by the display mode, depending on the hold passage route display color , The display mode of the hold digestion transfer image may be different, that is, the big hit expectation degree suggested by the hold digestion transfer image may be different, or the hold digestion transfer image may be different. Change easiness of the display mode of the image may be configured to differ. In addition, depending on the hold passage route display color, the contents of the effect of the design variation relating to the digested hold that has passed through the hold passage route SG17 may be different (the ratio at which the big hit expectation effect is executed may be different). You may.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a hold occurrence display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be executable, a situation where the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold simultaneously occur frequently. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display section SG16 common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. Further, in the order of the numbers "1 → 2 → 3 ... → 8" shown in the figure, regardless of whether the generated hold is the hold of the first main game side or the hold of the second main game side. Instead, the common hold display section SG16 is configured to display the hold in the order in which the hold occurred (the hold that occurred most recently is displayed in the area 1 and the hold display already displayed is "1 → 2". It will be shifted and displayed like "). In addition, the hold display mode is also the same display mode as the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game only by visually recognizing the common hold display section SG16. It is configured so that it is not possible to determine whether it is the hold display on the side or the hold display on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a hold-digesting display in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the display in the common hold display unit SG16 when the number of hold is 4 is illustrated. As shown in the same figure, two holdings on the first main gaming side and two holdings on the second main gaming side are displayed, and the first holding is “A1”, which is the holding on the first main gaming side. The second main game side has a hold "B1", the third main game side has a hold "A2", and the second main game side has a hold "B2". Has been done. Under these circumstances, the hold display when the hold is exhausted will be described in detail below.

  The middle part of the figure is an example of the order of the symbol fluctuations related to the above-mentioned four reservations, and the lower part of the figure is an example of how the hold display is being erased in the common hold display section SG16. With reference to these, the manner in which the symbol variation in the fifth embodiment is executed and the hold display is erased will be described in detail. First, when the symbol variation related to A1 which is the hold on the first main game side starts to be executed, the hold display of the area 1 which is the hold display related to A1 is erased, and the remaining hold is shifted and displayed. It The display on the common hold display section SG16 is "1st: B1, 2nd: A2, 3rd: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed at the symbol variation start timing related to A1. After 10 seconds, the symbol variation related to B1 which is the second main game side hold is started to be executed. The display on the common hold display section SG16 is "1st: A2, 2nd: B2". Then, 20 seconds after the start of the symbol variation related to A1, the symbol variation related to B1 ends. The symbol variation related to A1 is currently changing. Since the symbol variation related to B1 is completed, the suspension related to B2 is exhausted and the symbol variation is started, but in the display in the common suspension display section SG16, the suspension display related to "A2" is displayed. The pending display of the first area that has been displayed is erased. That is, apparently, the display in the area 1 is turned off from the state in which the areas 1 and 2 in the common hold display section SG16 are lit, and then the display in the area 2 is the area 1 Will be displayed in shift. On the other hand, since the hold actually consumed is the hold related to "B2", the display in the first area is the hold display related to "A2". As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold display displayed in the first area is displayed regardless of whether the actually held hold is the first main game side or the second main game side. It will be erased (turned off).

  Next, FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a holding passage route in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the pending passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area SG10. The hold-passage route has a main route that is a region through which the hold display variably displayed in the main region passes, and a sub-route that is a region through which the hold display variably displayed in the sub region passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example of a case where the hold exhaustion display when the reservation is exhausted passes through the main route. In a situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold of the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the area 1) and the hold of the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the area 2) A case in which "A1" which is the hold on the first main game side is first digested will be described. First, when “A1” is consumed, the reserved display in the first area is erased, and the reserved consumption display moves toward the reserved passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the first main game side related to the hold of "A1" is executed in the main area, the hold exhaustion display related to "A1" goes through the main route toward the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the figure is an example of a case where the hold exhaustion display when the reservation is exhausted passes through the subroute. In a situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold of the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the area 1) and the hold of the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the area 2) A case in which "B1", which is the hold on the second main game side, is first consumed will be described. First, as "B1" is consumed, the reserved display in the first area is erased, and the reserved consumption display moves toward the reserved passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the hold of "B1" is executed in the sub area, the hold exhaustion display related to "B1" goes through the sub route toward the sub area. . As described above, in the fifth embodiment, depending on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main area or the sub area, the area through which the reserved digestion display in the reserved passage route SG17 passes is the main route. Is configured to be determined.

  Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 are deleted, that is, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game is executed even when the second main game side has a hold. It is configured such that the prefetching effect related to the holding by the side can be executed. In this example, the prefetch effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time shortened game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect is also executed in the time shortened game state. It may be configured to be able to. Further, at the time of winning, that is, the pre-reading lottery on the first main game side can be executed only when the hold occurs, but it is not limited to this, the variation start timing of the main game symbol and the variation of the main game symbol The prefetch lottery may be executed even at a timing in the middle.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), that is, in step 2602 (fifth), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means. SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not it is currently in the time-reduced gaming state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process moves to step 2604, and if No in step 2602 (fifth), the process moves to the next process (process of step 2118).

  Further, when it is determined in step 2608 that the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination unit SM26 determines that the new holding is a big jackpot holding, in step 2610 (fifth), the holding destination reading effect execution availability determination unit SM26k has a predetermined probability. The winning pre-reading lottery for winning in (1/3 in this example) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. In addition, in step 2612, when the pending read-ahead rendering effect executability judging means SM26 determines that the new suspension is the suspension of the group C, in step 2616 (fifth), the pending read-ahead rendering effect executability determining means SM26k has a predetermined probability. The winning pre-reading lottery for winning (1/10 in this example) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the prefetching effect related to the second main game side hold can be executed even when the first main game side hold is present. In this example, the prefetch effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time shortened game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect is also executed in the time shortened game state. It may be configured to be able to. Further, at the time of winning, that is, the pre-reading lottery on the second main game side can be executed only when the hold occurs, but it is not limited to this, the fluctuation start timing of the main game symbol and the fluctuation of the main game symbol. The prefetch lottery may be executed even at a timing in the middle. In addition, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the same winning rate as the prefetch lottery winning rate on the first main game side is set.

  Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2249-1, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, 1 Decide the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 2249-8, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, the first symbol content determination flag (on the symbol fluctuation of the first main game side) The flag that is turned on when the content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

  In addition, in the case of No in step 2249-5, in step 2249-10, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the newly digested hold is the symbol variation from the standby state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, 2 The stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-15. In this way, when the decorative pattern newly starts changing from the standby state, it is variably displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative pattern is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. Is configured. In addition, when the decorative pattern newly started to change from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern starts to change during the change of the second decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern changes. Up to the previous, the second decorative design is variably displayed in the main area, but when the first decorative design starts variably, the first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub area. May be configured to variably display, or even if the first decorative pattern starts variably, the second decorative pattern is continuously variably displayed in the main area, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area. The display may be variable. As described above, since the decorative pattern that newly starts changing from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, when the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative pattern is The display of the first decorative design and the design in the main area is the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative design is an arithmetic number and the second decorative design is a Chinese numeral).

  Further, in the case of No in step 2249-10, in step 2249-13, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the sub area. Next, in step 2249-14, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the second sub area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, 2 Determine the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the figure display content determining means SM21n executes a main area interrupt process A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the package display content determination means SM21n is in the flag area of the package display related information temporary storage means SM21b, the second symbol content determination flag (in the variation of the symbol on the second main game side). The flag that is turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

  Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the packaging display content determination means SM21n executes an effect content determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2300). If No in step 2249-3, in step 3150 (fifth), a pre-reading display control process, which will be described later, is executed and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 2249-1, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts changing in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation other than the case where the interrupt effect is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always variably displayed in the main area (even in the standby state). The second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol may be variably displayed in the sub area.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n reads out the winning / winning lottery result related to the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the winning / winning lottery result and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and changes the symbol. The effect content concerned is determined. Next, in step 3358, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content related to the symbol variation, and the next process. The process moves to (processing of step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. Further, in the case of No in step 3354, in other words, when the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the winning / non-winning lottery result and the second decorative symbol. Based on the variation mode, the second decorative symbol effect content determination table is referenced to determine the effect content related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3362, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines the priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content of the symbol variation and temporarily stores it, and the next process (the process of step 2300) ). The priority will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 108 is an example of a first decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the result of winning or losing the first main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode), and depending on the determined effect content, it is interrupted. The first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not to execute the effect, are configured to be determined. It should be noted that the priority in the case of a big hit result is relatively higher than that in the case of a loss. In addition, the priority when the variation time is long is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. Further, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the symbol variation, and the second half priority is the priority related to the period after the execution of the SP reach effect is started. In the symbol variation (effect content) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, it is configured such that it has the first half priority but not the second half priority. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

  Next, FIG. 109 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the second decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the hit result of the second main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode), and depending on the determined effect content, it is interrupted. The priority, which is an element for determining whether or not to execute the effect, is configured to be determined. Unlike the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern does not have the two priorities of the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. It should be noted that the priority in the case of a big hit result is relatively higher than that in the case of a loss. In addition, the priority when the variation time is long is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n is in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the interruptable flag (the symbol variation of the determined second decorative symbol is The flag that turns on when there is a change that can execute the interrupt effect is turned on. Next, in step 3108, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the preview effect display content determination means SM24n causes the accessory initialization flag (with the accessory YK toward the initial position) in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. The flag for actuating) is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Even if No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, after it is determined that the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is interrupted (variably displayed in the sub area. It is configured to determine whether or not it is a change capable of executing the effect of exchanging the display areas of the decorative pattern and the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the main area. If it is determined that the second decorative symbol can be interrupted, the position of the accessory YK is confirmed, and if the accessory YK is in operation, the accessory YK is driven to the initial position. Is configured to control. With such a configuration, the details will be described later, but at the timing of executing the interrupt effect (the first timing of the plurality of effects), the proportion of the accessory YK stopped at the initial position is increased. be able to.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the prefetching display control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether the newly digested hold is a hold associated with the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154 the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is not a trigger hold. If Yes in step 3154, in step 3156 the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol to be the first read-ahead area, and proceeds to step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the prefetch effect execution (from the start of execution of the first symbol change after the trigger hold exists until the end of the symbol change related to the trigger hold), the first decoration The display area of the design and the second decorative design is configured to change, and like the image of the pre-reading effect display device in the lower part of the figure, the first decorative design in which the first decorative design is variably displayed in the lower left of the display area SG10 One area is provided, and the read-ahead second area in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the read-ahead first area and the read-ahead second area have the same display area. Has been done. Further, the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design is configured to be displayed only by numbers, as in the case of displaying in the sub area. As described above, when two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device having a larger display area) has two decorative symbols (first The decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) may be variably displayed (or stopped).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No at step 3154, at step 3158, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as “prefetch first area → enlarge at SP reach”, and step 3158. Move to. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension during the prefetch effect execution is performed, the variation of the decorative symbol related to the trigger suspension is enlarged and displayed in the center portion of the display area SG10, and SP reach is performed. The performance is configured to be executed. The decorative pattern that is not enlarged (for example, when the first decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the second decorative pattern) is variably displayed in a position that does not overlap the display area of the enlarged decorative pattern. Just do it. Next, in step 3158, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the first sub area symbol table based on the stop symbol of the first main game symbol and the information on the variation mode, and the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and The variation mode is determined. As described above, since the variation mode of the decorative symbol during the pre-reading effect is determined by referring to the first sub region symbol table or the second sub region symbol table, the display pattern of the decorative symbol is displayed in the sub region. Only the same numbers as are displayed. Next, in step 3160, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) ).

  Further, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3162, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3162, the package drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern as the prefetch second area, and proceeds to step 3168. In the case of No in step 3162, in step 3166, the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol to be “preread second area → enlarge at SP reach”, and proceeds to step 3168. In the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is a hold related to the first decorative symbol or a hold related to the second decorative symbol, it is enlarged and displayed when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed. Is configured. Next, in step 3168, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the second sub area symbol table based on the stop symbol of the second main game symbol and the information on the variation mode, and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol and The variation mode is determined. Next, in step 3170, the design drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2300) ).

  Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316. After the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, Alternatively, when it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines that the main control board M. It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2344 (fifth), at step 2346 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the variable display area (the main area or the sub area when the prefetch effect is not being executed). ), A stop display command (fixed display) for stopping the first decorative symbol with a forced loss symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step 2340. It should be noted that the display mode of the forced loss design of the first decorative design or the second decorative design will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114.

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in step 2368, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the second packaging variable time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. Even if No in step 2366, the process proceeds to step 2374.

  Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol varying flag is on. If Yes in step 2374, in step 2376, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2378, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the second decoration based on the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the variation start timing of the symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2378, in step 2379, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the second decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ), And it transfers to step 3200 (fifth).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2378, in step 2380, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has the variation mode temporarily stored in the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2380, in step 2381, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the second decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit). (Sent to the SS side), and proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2380, in step 2382, the notice production display control means SM24 (and the reach production display control means SM25) causes the first packaging variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice production related information temporary storage means SM24b. (And the variation mode temporarily stored in the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the notice effect display control unit SM24 (and the reach effect display control unit SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). Even if No in step 2382, the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

  Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes a main area interrupt process B, which will be described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2384, in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, The main side information temporary storage means SM11b is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). If Yes in step 2385, in step 2386, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (fixed display command) of the second decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Sent to). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes a main area interrupt process C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

  Further, in the case of No in step 2384, in step 2388, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the second decorative symbol in the variably displayed area (or the main area or the sub area when the prefetch effect is not being executed). A stop display command (confirmed display) for stopping with the forced loss pattern is set, and the process proceeds to step 2390. It should be noted that the display mode of the forced loss design of the first decorative design or the second decorative design will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. Next, in step 2390, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the second packaging variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2400) Move to. Even if No in step 2374 or step 2385, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 114 is an image drawing of a stop symbol display during a big hit in the fifth embodiment. First, the case where the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area, which is shown in the upper part of the figure, is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol will be described. First, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After that, since the first main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed in the main area (“777” in the figure). Further, since the first decorative design is stopped and displayed as the big hit design, the second decorative design is stopped and displayed as the forced loss design. The forced loss design of the second decorative design is "Kirin", and is a design that is stopped and displayed only when the second main game design is forcibly stopped. In addition, when the second decorative design is stopped and displayed with the forced loss design, the background effect in the sub-region becomes the special background effect (the background performance that is executed only when the forced loss design is stopped and displayed).

  Next, a case where the second decorative symbol shown in the sub-region, which is shown in the lower part of the figure, is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol will be described. First, the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area. After that, since the second main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed in the sub area (“777” in the figure). Further, the second decorative design is stopped and displayed as a big hit design, so that the first decorative design is stopped and displayed as a forced loss design. Incidentally, the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol is "zoo", and is a symbol which is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. In addition, when the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the main area is a special background effect (background effect that is executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss by stopping the first main game symbol with the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol will be displayed. And the forced lost design of the first decorative design that will be stopped and displayed when the first main gaming design is forcibly stopped due to a loss due to the forced lost design of the second main gaming design and the big hit design. Are configured to have different display modes. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area are different display modes. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be “blue”, and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be “red”. The display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the special background effect in the sub area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same (only the color is the same, the pattern is different, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is a timing 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the second decorative pattern, and it is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. There is. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is turned on when the interruptable flag (in the main area interrupt processing A described above, the variation of the second decorative symbol can be interrupted). Flag) is ON. If Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing status of the changing first decorative symbol is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative pattern, the portion before the SP reach start is the first half, and the SP reach start is the latter half, and in the variation in which the SP reach is not executed, only the first half is provided. I have decided not to.

  In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has the first-half priority of the first decorative symbol changing in the main region and the priority of the second decorative symbol changing in the sub region. Are compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3206, at step 3210, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 gives priority to the second half priority of the changing first decorative symbol in the main region and the changing second decorative symbol in the sub region. And the flow proceeds to step 3212. Next, in step 3212, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol. The priority of the first decorative pattern is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect in the effect mode when the accessory is not operated (the character YK is stopped at the initial position, The effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started is determined, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 causes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to be an effect mode during operation of the accessory (a state in which the accessory YK is activated with the exception of the interrupt effect as a trigger). In, the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started) is set, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. Thus, when the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative symbol, the interrupt effect can be executed, but the accessory YK is at the initial position. It is configured such that the effect mode of the interrupt effect differs depending on whether or not it is stopped. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the interrupt effect is an effect that is executed when the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation is high (the priority of the second decorative symbol is high), so that the player is conspicuous to see ( It is preferable to execute in a (flashy) production mode. Therefore, it is preferable to execute both the effect display on the liquid crystal (display area SG10) and the operation of the accessory, rather than the effect display only on the liquid crystal (display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interrupt effect while the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, the effect when the interrupt effect is executed is configured by activating the accessory YK to the initial position when the accessory YK is in operation when the main area interrupt process A is executed. As an aspect, it is possible to configure so that the ratio of selecting the effect aspect when the accessory is not activated increases. The interrupt effect in steps 3216 and 3218 (the interrupt effect executed at the first interrupt timing) may be referred to as a first interrupt effect.

  Next, in step 3220, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for switching the display of the decorative symbols in the main region and the sub region, and proceeds to step 3222. Even if No in step 3202, step 3204, or step 3212, the process moves to step 3222. Here, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is In the case of a big hit, if the display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not changed, the second decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the sub area that is a smaller area than the main area is a big hit symbol. The joy of becoming a big hit for the player is alleviated. Therefore, by executing the interruption effect and setting the variable display of the second decorative design, which is a big hit, as the main area, the big hit design can be stopped and displayed in the main area, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. .

Next, in step 3222, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub area. If Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative design is the timing 5 seconds before the end of the variation of the second decorative design. In the case of Yes in step 3224, in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing second decorative symbol is a symbol change that is a big hit. If Yes in step 3226, in step 3228, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is not in operation as the fluctuating effect of the first decorative symbol. If Yes in step 3230, in step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of the decorative symbols in the main region and the sub region, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2384). In addition, also in the case of No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228, or step 3230, it shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2384). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even when it is not determined that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol at the first interrupt timing, at the second interrupt timing. When the following conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed as the second interrupt effect.
(1) The second decorative pattern is changing in the sub area,
(2) The fluctuation of the second decorative design is a big hit,
(3) The priority of the changing second decorative pattern is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more,
(4) The accessory YK is not operating as an effect during the change of the first decorative symbol,
When the above conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect will be executed.

  Although not shown, since the second interrupt effect is configured to be executed when the accessory YK is not operating, it is preferable that the effect mode is an effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. Is. In addition, the effect mode of the second interruption effect may be an effect mode in which the player can determine that the change of the second decorative symbol is a big hit when the accessory YK operates. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed and the first decorative design is executed. The decorative design is variably displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the main area, but when the interrupt effect is finished, that is, the design on the second main game side related to the interrupt effect. If the variation is a loss, the timing when the variation of the second decorative symbol related to the interruption effect ends, when the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the interruption effect is a big hit, the timing of ending the big hit , The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 117, the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 117 (FIG. 115) may be the symbol fluctuation end timing = the symbol fluctuation stop timing, or the temporary fluctuation of the symbol. It may be the timing immediately before the stop or the timing immediately before the stop of the fixed symbol fluctuation. Furthermore, if it is the last timing of the interrupt timing that exists a plurality in one symbol variation period, it may be during symbol variation. Further, when the interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are exchanged, for example, when the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is When executed, the first decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed. Until the end, it is configured so that the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not interchanged (while the change of the second decorative pattern in which the interruption effect is executed, the next change of the first decorative pattern starts. It is preferable that the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area even in the case of being performed).

  Next, FIG. 116 is an interrupt effect execution image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an effect mode when the accessory is activated is illustrated. First, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After that, 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol, and at the time when the first interrupt timing comes, the accessory YK is operating as an effect corresponding to the variation of the first decorative symbol. In this case, the interrupt effect is executed, but since the accessory YK cannot be operated as the interrupt effect, the liquid crystal display only effect mode (effect mode in which the accessory YK does not operate) is achieved. The interruption effect will be executed. In the same figure, a state in which the accessory YK that has been operating as an effect related to the first decorative symbol returns to the initial position is illustrated.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, an effect mode when the accessory is not operated is illustrated. First, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After 5 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and the first interrupt timing has come, the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since the accessory YK can be operated as the interrupt effect, the interrupt effect is executed in the effect mode of "liquid crystal display + effect operation" (effect mode in which the effect YK operates). It will be. In the figure, a state in which the accessory YK is operating in the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupt effect related to the second decorative symbol is illustrated.

  Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt processing C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing second decorative symbol is a symbol change that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (3 in this example) or more. If Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the third interrupt effect as the interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for switching the display of the decorative symbols in the main region and the sub region, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2390). Even if No in step 3252 or step 3254, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2390). In this way, even when the interrupt effect (second interrupt effect) cannot be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the change in the pattern of the executed second decorative design is a change that causes a big hit, (2) execution If the two conditions of the priority of the rendered second decorative design are a predetermined value (3 in this example) or more, and both of the two conditions are satisfied, a third interrupt rendering is performed as an interrupt rendering at the stop timing of the second decorative design. Is configured to perform. The stop timing of the second decorative symbol is called the third interrupt timing. Further, as the effect mode of the third interrupt effect, since the execution of the third interrupt effect = start of the big hit, the effect mode of celebrating the player who has confirmed the big hit, and the same effect as when the big hit starts It may be configured to execute. In addition, it may be an effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. In addition, the effect mode of the third interruption effect may be configured to be different depending on whether the accessory YK is operating or not as the effect content related to the variation of the first decorative symbol.

  Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the pre-reading flag (a flag that is turned on when the pre-reading effect is being executed) is off. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 2522, in step 2524 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol in the first main area after the trigger hold occurrence has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension, and based on the result of the trigger suspension, until the calculated time elapses. The pre-reading notice production scenario is determined. Here, the lower part of the figure is a pre-reading notice effect execution image diagram. The figure illustrates an example in which the pre-notification advance notice effect scenario is determined and the pre-reading effect is executed. First, at the change start timing of the first decorative pattern after the trigger hold occurrence (the change start timing of the decorative pattern that starts changing earlier between the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the pattern change end related to the trigger hold is ended. The time until is calculated and the pre-notification advance notice scenario for the period is determined. Then, after 20 seconds have passed from the first symbol variation start timing, the display of "Atsui" is executed as a dialog notice. After that, the cut-in effect is executed when 40 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing. After that, 60 seconds have passed from the first symbol variation start timing, and thus the effect that the accessory YK operates is executed. After that, 70 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, and the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is completed. In the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed at the same time, so if the notice production is executed based on the variation time of one symbol variation, the notice production relating to any symbol variation Is recognized, that is, there is a risk that it will be recognized which symbol fluctuation the symbol fluctuation related to trigger hold is, and the interestingness of the symbol fluctuation related to hold other than trigger hold becomes low. I will end up. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the enjoyment of the entire prefetching effect is enhanced by managing the execution timing of the notice effect according to the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol after the trigger hold occurrence.

  Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the prefetching flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "prefetching background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. In this way, the "prefetch background" is set to Yes in step 2526, that is, is set first at the variation start timing of the decorative symbol in the first main area after the trigger hold occurrence. In other words, the timing at which the "normal background" is switched to the "prefetching background" is the start timing of the symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is “background during prefetching”, as described above with reference to FIG. 111, the prefetching first area in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed is provided in the lower left part of the display area SG10. The read-ahead second area in which the second decorative pattern is variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the read-ahead first area and the read-ahead second area are variably displayed side by side in the same display area. It will be. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2522, in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is completed. If Yes in step 2534, in step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. Even if No in step 2524 or step 2526, the process moves to step 2538. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2534, in step 2540 the background effect display control means SM23 sets "prefetching background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. The "prefetching background" and the "normal background" can be displayed in any manner as long as they can be visually identified by the player.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory driving control process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content relating to the symbol variation is newly determined. In step 3302, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect other than the case where the prefetching effect is not being executed is determined. If Yes in step 3302, in step 3304 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an action schedule of the accessory YK in the newly decided effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the variation mode and effect content of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation, and proceeds to step 3314. Further, in the case of No in step 3302, in step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the prefetching notice effect scenario is newly determined. In step 3308, it is determined whether or not the effect contents when the pre-reading effect is being executed have been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an action schedule of the accessory YK in the newly decided effect content. If Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the pre-reading notice effect scenario, and proceeds to step 3314. Even if No in step 3304, step 3308, or step 3310, the process moves to step 3314.

  Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines that the accessory initialization flag (the change in the second decorative symbol is an interruptible change. It is determined whether or not a flag for activating the accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. In the case of Yes in step 3314, in step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory TK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the accessory initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. Even if No in step 3314, the process moves to step 3320. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the accessory YK is operating from the initial position at the time when it is determined that the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is an interruptable variation, the operation is performed. It is configured to execute the control for returning the accessory YK that is being moved to the initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is the current execution timing of the interrupt effect. In the case of Yes in step 3320, in step 3322 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is an interrupt effect in the effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. As the interrupt effect in which the accessory YK operates, for example, an interrupt effect (first interrupt effect) that is an effect mode when the accessory is not operated is executed at the first interrupt timing, and a second interrupt effect is executed. Is performed, the third interruption effect is executed, and so on. In the case of Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interrupt effect, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). Even if No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in parallel on the effect display device. By making the lottery executable, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is the first decorative design, and the decorative design corresponding to the second main game side is the second decorative design, the first main game side The symbol variation and the symbol variation on the second main game side can be simultaneously displayed. In addition, the first decorative design is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative design is mainly displayed in a sub-area having a smaller display area than the main area, and the second decorative design displayed in the sub-area. In the case where the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation related to is high, the variable effect of the decorative symbol desired to be shown to the player is configured by executing the interrupt effect and displaying the display of the second decorative symbol in the main area. You can make it look bigger in the main area, which will increase the fun of the game.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is displayed in the main region, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in the sub region, and the second When the priority of the decorative pattern is large (for example, the jackpot expectation is high), the interrupt effect is executed to display the second decorative pattern in the main area, but the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured. The display mode of is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modified example from the fifth embodiment, and only the modified points from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), that is, the figure display content determination means SM21n is withheld in step 2249-3. If it is determined that there is no trigger hold in, in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), the packaging display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation from the standby state. . In the case of Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth variation 1), the design drawing display content determination means SM21n displays information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on the first main area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth variation 1), the design drawing display content determination means SM21n relates to the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines that the newly digested hold is on the first main game side. It is determined whether or not the call is on hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth variation 1), the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n sets the display area of the decoration symbol to the symbol of the previous first decoration symbol. Decide on the same display area as the fluctuation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth variation 1), the packaging display content determination means SM21n, based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, the first main area symbol table or the first sub By referring to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to steps 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). In addition, in the case of No in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth variation 1), the design drawing display content determination means SM21n sets the display area of the decoration symbol to the previous second decoration symbol. The display area is determined to be the same as the symbol variation of. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth variation 1), the packaging display content determination means SM21n, the second main area symbol table or the second sub based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol By referring to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to steps 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the display area of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation is a sub area. If Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3100 (fifth), and if No, the process proceeds to step 2249-15. Thus, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative design starts to change when not in the standby state, the previous design in both the first decorative design and the second decorative design. It is configured to be changed in the area (either the main area or the sub area) that has been changed and displayed due to the change. Further, in the case of the standby state, when the decorative pattern starts to change, regardless of whether the decorative pattern that newly starts changing is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, it is newly updated from the standby state. The decorative pattern that has started to change is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern that has started to change later is variably displayed in the sub area.

  Next, FIG. 121 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the modified example 1 from the fifth embodiment, which of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area is not fixedly determined, and therefore the first decorative pattern is also the first. Similar to the decorative pattern, the determined effect contents are configured to determine the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not to execute the interrupt effect. It should be noted that the priority in the case of a big hit result is relatively higher than that in the case of a loss. In addition, the priority when the variation time is long is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. Further, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the symbol variation, and the second half priority is the priority related to the period after the execution of the SP reach effect is started. In the symbol variation (effect content) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, it is configured such that it has the first half priority but not the second half priority. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a main area interrupt process A related to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 120 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth variation 1), step 3102 (fifth variation 1), step 3104 (fifth variation 1), step 3114 (fifth variation 1), and step 3116 (third variation). 5 change 1), that is, in step 3112 (fifth change 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative pattern variably displayed in the sub area is the second decorative pattern. judge. If Yes in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3102 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative design is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. judge. If Yes in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the process moves to step 3106, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). In addition, in the case of No at step 3112 (fifth variation 1), at step 3114 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. . In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n indicates that the first half priority of the confirmed first decorative design is a predetermined value (in this example, a predetermined value). 2) It is determined whether or not the above. If Yes at step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area and the case where the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area are both provided. Since it is configured to be able to execute the interrupt effect also in the case, it is determined whether or not the variation of the decorative design currently displayed in the sub area is a variation capable of executing the interrupt effect. Further, since the timing of executing the process is the timing before the SP reach starts (the timing before the start of the symbol variation), the first half priority is confirmed as the priority.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The modification from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316, it is decorated in step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, in step 2328 the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing, or in step 2326. When the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines that the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has not been reached, in step 3200 (fifth variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 causes a main area interrupt process, which will be described later. Execute B, and proceed to step 2344 (fifth).

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth variation 1) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative symbol is changing in the sub area. In the modified example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in the figure is executed in the first decorative symbol display control process, the first decorative symbol is determined and the second decorative symbol is determined. When it is executed in the decorative symbol display control process, it is determined for the second decorative symbol. If Yes in step 3236, in step 3237, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative design, and the decorative design that is variably displayed in the sub area at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3237, in step 3238 the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, in step 3239, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing state of the decorative symbol being changed in the main area is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the decorative pattern, the part before the SP reach start is the first half, and the SP reach start is the latter half, and only the first half is included in the change in which the SP reach is not executed. I am trying.

  In the case of Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main region with the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub region. , And shift to step 3242-1. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3239, at step 3241, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the second half priority of the decorative symbol that is changing in the main region and the first half priority of the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub region. The comparison is performed, and the process proceeds to step 3242-1. Next, at step 3242-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub area is higher than the priority of the decorative symbol changed in the main area. To determine. The priority of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3242-2 whether the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the effect mode of the interrupt effect in the effect mode when the accessory is not operated (the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). In the state, the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started is determined, the command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 causes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to be the effect mode at the time of character effect operation (the character object YK is actuated by the opportunity other than the interrupt effect. In that state, the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started is determined, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the sub area is larger than the first half priority or the second half priority of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is executed. The effect mode of the interrupt effect differs depending on whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

  Next, in step 3242-5, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for switching the display of the decorative symbols in the main region and the sub region, and proceeds to step 3242-6. In addition, also in the case of No at step 3237, step 3238 or step 3242-1, the process proceeds to step 3242-6.

  Next, in step 3242-6, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub area. If Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3242-7, in step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub area is a symbol change that is a big hit. If Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the second half priority of the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub area is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). It is determined whether or not (the second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, so the second half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is operating as the changing effect of the changing decorative symbol in the main area. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interrupt effect in step 3243-2. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for switching the display of the decorative symbols in the main region and the sub region, and the next process {process 2344 (fifth) process } To move. In addition, also in the case of No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9 or step 3243-1, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2344 (fifth)}. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the interruption effect is executed to switch the display of the decorative pattern between the main area and the sub area, the decorative pattern newly displayed in the main area. Whether or not the symbol variation related to is a big hit, the display area of the decorative symbol after that is configured to be the display area after the execution of the interrupt effect. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. The first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, and even when the result of the variation of the symbol of the second decorative symbol is lost as the execution result of the interruption effect, the second ornament is displayed in the main area in the next symbol variation. The design is displayed, and the first decorative design is displayed in the sub area. The third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 124 (FIG. 124) may be the symbol fluctuation end timing = the symbol fluctuation stop timing, or the timing immediately before the temporary stop of the symbol fluctuation or the timing immediately before the fixed stop of the symbol fluctuation. May be Furthermore, if it is the last timing of the interrupt timing that exists a plurality in one symbol variation period, it may be during symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3260 (fifth variation 1) and step 3262 (fifth variation 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 is It is determined whether or not the design variation of the decorative design that is changing in the sub area is a big variation. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 determines that the second half priority of the symbol variation of the decorative symbol changing in the sub area is a predetermined value. (In this example, 3) is determined (third interrupt timing is after the SP reach start timing, so the second half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the process moves to step 3256, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2340).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device. As a configuration, by enabling parallel lottery, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is the first decorative design, and the decorative design corresponding to the second main game side is the second decorative design, The first main game side symbol variation and the second main game side symbol variation can be configured to be displayed at the same time. Further, of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the decorative pattern that first started variable display in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and then the decorative pattern that started variable display is displayed in the sub area. By configuring so, it is possible to equalize the value of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and to display the first decorative design in the main area and the second decorative design in the main area. By frequently changing the display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to any symbol fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side and the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments is added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (1),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) that performs a win / fail judgment based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win / no judgment.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the variable display of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the variable display of the second effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is one production period, and within the certain one production period, both the first production design and the second production design can be variably displayed.
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed prior to being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the tentatively stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation in which it is variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the first effect symbol is provisionally stopped and displayed, the first effect symbol is confirmed. The special stop display mode that is not displayed when it is stopped and displayed is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
The second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the special stop display mode is configured not to be temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain effect period. is there.

Pachinko game machine according to the present aspect (1-2),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display section that can display effects,
It is provided with a sub game part that controls the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
First game content determination means for performing a win / fail judgment based on the first random number, and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail determination,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be variably displayed on the first identification information display part and then stopping the first identification information.
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
Second game content determination means for performing a win / fail judgment based on the second random number, and determining a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win / fail determination.
According to the determination by the second game content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be variably displayed on the second identification information display part and then stop the second identification information.
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous to the player,
With the game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information necessary for the performance display executed on the sub-game section side to the sub-game section side, the second identification information is variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed. And the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit, the first effect symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the first effect symbol on the effect display unit,
After the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit, the second effect symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the second effect symbol on the effect display unit,
Within the period from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display, or within the period from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, both the first effect design and the second effect design can be variably displayed. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
The first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed before being definitely stopped and displayed in the certain one effect period, and the provisional If it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the first effect symbol is provisionally stopped and displayed, The special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitely stopped and displayed is configured to be provisionally stopped and displayed,
The second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period is characterized in that the special stop display mode is configured not to be temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain effect period. It is a machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (2),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) that performs a win / fail judgment based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win / no judgment.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After a plurality of types of first effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the first effect symbols that are one kind or a combination of a plurality of kinds are effect effect display units (for example, First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG),
After a plurality of types of second effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one effect or a combination of two or more kinds of second effect symbols is effect effect display unit (for example, The effect display device SG) is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to be stopped and displayed,
The period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one production period, and within the certain one production period, the first production design is variably displayed and then definitely displayed, and within the certain one production period. In, it is configured to stop the display definitely after the second effect design is variably displayed,
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed prior to being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the tentatively stopped. When it is displayed, it is configured to be variably displayed again within the certain one production period, and when the first production symbol is definitely or tentatively stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display. While the special game is not executed, after that, a special stop display mode indicating that there is a possibility of executing the special game can be stopped and displayed as the first effect design which is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. Is configured,
The second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period cannot be provisionally stopped and displayed before being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, or the certain one effect Even when the temporary stop display is displayed before the stop display is confirmed within the period, the special stop display mode is the second effect design that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. It is not possible to stop display, and even when the second effect design is definitely stopped and displayed, the special stop display mode is not stopped and displayed as the second effect design that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) that performs a win / fail judgment based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win / no judgment.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the variable display of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the variable display of the second effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is one production period, and within the certain one production period, both the first production design and the second production design can be variably displayed.
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed prior to being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the tentatively stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation in which it is variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the first effect symbol is provisionally stopped and displayed, the first effect symbol is confirmed. The special stop display mode that is not displayed when it is stopped and displayed is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
The second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period is configured such that the special stop display mode is not provisionally stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period,
As the display state of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, the first effect symbol that is variably displayed is visible to the player, and the first effect symbol that is variably displayed. Is not displayed or is configured to adopt either the second display state in which the first effect design is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the first display state, and the second effect within a certain effect period. The design is configured to be displayed at least in the case of the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is provisionally stopped and displayed as the first effect design within a certain effect period, the specification that cannot be included when the first effect design is definitely stopped and displayed It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes a type of first effect design, or a second special stop display mode that does not include the specific type of first effect design,
When the first effect design is tentatively stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is tentatively compared to the case where the first special stop display mode is tentatively stopped and displayed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the expectation of execution of the special game after the end of the certain one effect period is higher when it is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (4),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A and the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, a symbol holding means MJ32) that temporarily stores the acquired random number up to and controls so that the hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the mode,
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (eg, effect display device SG), the effect design is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (eg, effect display device SG). Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
The period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one production period, and the production symbols can be variably displayed within a certain production period.
The effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed prior to being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the tentatively stopped and displayed. If it is possible, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain one production period, and when the production symbol is definitely or tentatively stopped, the tentatively or tentatively stopped. While the special game is not executed at the time of the display, the special stop display mode showing that the special game may be executed after the certain or temporary stop display is fixed or provisional It is configured to be able to be stopped displayed in
After a certain hold has occurred and before the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the certain hold is defined as a specific hold, and when the certain hold occurs , If there is one or more pre-digestion holds that are the holds that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information before the specific hold, change the display start condition of the identification information regarding the pre-digestion hold. Within the one production period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stopped and displayed as the production symbol only when the production symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, while the identification regarding the specific hold is performed. Within one production period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of the information is satisfied, the special design as the production design is performed only when the production design is provisionally stopped and displayed. It is pachinko machines, characterized in that stop display mode is configured to be displayed temporarily stopped.

A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A and the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that the hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the mode,
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the effect symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one production period, and the production symbols can be variably displayed within a certain production period.
The effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed prior to being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the tentatively stopped and displayed. If it is possible, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain one production period, and when the production symbol is definitely or tentatively stopped, the tentatively or tentatively stopped. While the special game is not executed at the time of the display, the special stop display mode showing that the special game may be executed after the certain or temporary stop display is fixed or provisional It is configured to be able to be stopped displayed in
When the production symbol is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain production period, if the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as the production symbol, at least one special production symbol and special It is configured to be a combination with a plurality of normal effect designs that are of a different type from the effect design,
After a certain hold occurs, but before the condition for starting variable display of identification information about the certain hold is satisfied, if the certain condition is satisfied, the certain hold is defined as a specific hold, and at the time when the specific hold occurs. , If there is one or more pre-digestion holds that are the holds that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information before the specific hold, change the display start condition of the identification information regarding the pre-digestion hold. When the special stop display mode is definitely or tentatively stopped and displayed within one production period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, while the plurality of normal production symbols cannot be the same type, identification regarding specific suspension When the special stop display mode is deterministically or tentatively stopped and displayed within one effect period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the plurality of normal effects are displayed. Symbol is pachinko machine, characterized by being configured so that can be the same type.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (6),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and that can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a second starting port (for example, a second state). The game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content) that executes a win / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail determination. Deciding means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), the first identification information is displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling one identification information to be stopped and displayed,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content) that executes a win / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win / fail determination. Deciding means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win / fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win / fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the effect symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one production period, and the production symbols can be variably displayed within a certain production period. Has been done,
The effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period may be tentatively stopped and displayed prior to being definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the tentatively stopped and displayed. If it is possible, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is variably displayed again within the certain one production period, and when the production symbol is definitely or tentatively stopped, the tentatively or tentatively stopped. While the special game is not executed at the time of the display, the special stop display mode showing that the special game may be executed after the certain or temporary stop display is fixed or provisional It is configured to be able to be stopped displayed in
In the one production period corresponding to the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display, and the one special production period corresponding to the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, the special stop The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured to be different from each other in a definite or provisionally stopped display ratio.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (7),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A and the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that the hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the mode,
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the variable display of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the variable display of the second effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is one production period, and within the certain one production period, both the first production design and the second production design can be variably displayed.
If there is a predetermined number of holdings at any timing within a certain effect period, the first effect symbol that is variably displayed within the certain effect period is within the certain effect period. It is performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding any of the predetermined number of holdings is satisfied after the display is not definitely stopped and displayed continuously after the end of the certain performance period. During the one production period, while the first production design that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is definitely stopped and displayed,
Even if there is a predetermined number of holdings at any timing within a certain effect period, the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within the certain effect period is within the certain effect period. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be stopped and displayed definitely.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) that performs a win / fail judgment based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win / no judgment.
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after
After the result of the win / no determination is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30),
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side. MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the variable display of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the variable display of the second effect symbol on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the variable display start of the identification information to the stop display is one production period, and within the certain one production period, both the first production design and the second production design can be variably displayed.
When a plurality of types of first effect symbols are provided and the result of the winning / disapproval determination is winning, when the first effect symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of first effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / disapproval determination is non-winning, when the stop display of the first effect design is configured to stop display a combination of the first effect design that is not the same type,
When a plurality of types of second effect symbols are provided and the result of the win / fail judgment is a win, when the second effect symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the second effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / non-winning determination is non-winning, when the second production design is stopped and displayed, it is configured to stop and display a combination of the second production design that is not the same type
More than the total number of combinations of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win / fail determination is non-win, a combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win / fail determination is non-win It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
The effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) has a plurality of kinds of effect display modes as effect display modes that are dependent upon controlling the effect display content displayed.
When displaying a certain first effect symbol of the plurality of types of first effect symbols, a display attribute relating to the certain first effect symbol in an effect display mode of a certain type, and the certain type Different from the display attribute related to the certain first effect design in the effect display mode different from the effect display mode of
When displaying a certain second effect symbol of the plurality of types of second effect symbols, a display attribute relating to the certain second effect symbol in an effect display mode of a certain type, and the certain type It is configured such that the display attribute relating to the certain second effect design in the effect display mode different from the effect display mode of is different,
The result of the win / loss determination is non-winning than the probability that the certain first effect design is included in the combination of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win / loss determination is non-win. A pachinko game machine characterized in that a combination of second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed in such a case is configured so that the probability that the certain second effect symbol is included is higher.

(Sixth Embodiment)
Here, although some of the above-described embodiments have been partially described, an example of a configuration further applicable to the above-described embodiments will be described in detail below as a sixth embodiment. For example, in addition to the configuration including the first production design and the second production design described in the first embodiment, the configuration of the image display overlapping the first production design and the second production design of the fourth embodiment, It is possible to appropriately provide one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment. Further, the configuration of image display overlapping with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or more configurations may be added as appropriate. Although it is supplementary, it is not limited to the above-exemplified combination, and the configuration described in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be appropriately applied to one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment. It may be changed or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate, including combination with a configuration of image display that overlaps with the notice effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

<< Significance of terms >>
The meaning of each term in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that the configurations and effects according to the following terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Decorative pattern>
The decorative pattern is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and suggests or informs the result of the winning / winning lottery on the main game side. After the decorative pattern starts changing, it is temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped. Further, the result of the winning / winning lottery on the main game side can be suggested or notified by the stop display mode (stop pattern) when the fixed stop is performed.
<Effect of decorative pattern>
(1) With the decorative design, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change is occurring, that the change is waiting, the result of the lottery, etc.

<First decorative pattern>
The first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed so that the player can easily see it.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the entertaining effect of the changing production.
(2) The first decorative symbol can be informed of the result of the game by displaying the fixed stop.

<Second decorative pattern>
The second decorative design is a decorative design that is changing at all times or when the player cannot easily see the first decorative design or when the player cannot see the first decorative design.
<Effect of the second decorative pattern>
(1) When always displayed: The second decorative symbol can be informed of the result of the game by performing a fixed stop display.
(2) When it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative design or cannot be visually recognized 1: The second decorative design may be fixedly stopped and displayed when the first decorative design is fixedly stopped and displayed, but the second decorative design is fixedly stopped and displayed. It is preferable to display (temporary stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or when the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized without doing so (in this case, this temporary stop display should inform the result of the game. You can .
(3) When the first decorative design is difficult or invisible 2: The second decorative design is only variable display without performing the temporary stop display and the fixed stop display, and the first decorative design is difficult or invisible However, it is possible to clearly notify that the change is occurring.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area for displaying the first decorative pattern. In the main area, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped.
<Effect of main area>
(1) The first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to perform variable display rich in performance.

<Sub area>
The sub area is a display area for displaying the second decorative pattern. The second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable or stopped state in the sub area.
<Effect of sub area>
(1) The second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for change>
The variable waiting state is a state in which the main game symbol and the decorative symbol have not changed. It may be referred to as a fluctuation stopped state while the fluctuation is stopped.
<Effect of waiting for fluctuations>
(1) It is possible to inform that the game is not in progress while waiting for fluctuation.

<Waiting movie>
The waiting movie is a display of a moving image that indicates to the player that the movie is not changing.
<Effect of waiting movie>
(1) By displaying the waiting movie, it is possible to suggest that it is a vacant table and can be played.

<Hold display>
The hold display is an image that is controlled by the sub control board S and indicates the number of fluctuations that are not executed on the main game side.
<Effect of hold display>
(1) The player can easily recognize the unchanged number.

<First hold display>
The first hold display is a hold display that is displayed so that the player can easily see it.
<Effect of 1st hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the unchanged number.
(2) By changing the display mode of the first hold display, the possibility of winning can be suggested.

<Second hold display>
The second hold display is a hold display that is visible to the player at all times or when it is difficult for the player to see the first hold display or when the player cannot see the first hold display.
<Effect of second hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the unchanged number.

<First hold display area>
The first hold display area is an area for displaying the first hold display. A display indicating the upper limit number of the first hold display may be performed.
<Effect of the first hold display area>
(1) The first hold display can be displayed.
(2) A display indicating the upper limit number of the first hold display can be made.

<Second hold display area>
The second hold display area is an area for displaying the second hold display.
<Effect of second hold display area>
(1) The second hold display can be displayed.

<Shift display (shift animation)>
The shift display (shift animation) is a display of a moving image when moving the first hold display displayed when the number of hold is decreased.
<Effect of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easy to recognize that the number of holdings has decreased.

<Hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation)>
The hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when a new first hold display is displayed when the number of hold increases.
<Effect of occurrence display (holding occurrence animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easy to recognize that the number of holdings has increased.

<Deferred display for effect of the fluctuation (holding digest transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The effect production hold display is also called a hold digest transmission image or a change corresponding image, and is an image displayed when a certain hold is consumed.
<Effect of suspension display for production of the fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit with respect to a change that is currently changing.

<Holding display area for effect of the change>
The effect pending display area of the variation is an area for displaying an image displayed when a certain hold is exhausted.
<Effect of the pending display area for production of the fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to display the effect pending display of the variation.
(2) It can be suggested that the effect pending display of the variation is displayed.

<Display priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of the image and the moving image displayed on the effect display device (the order of display from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in an overlapping manner, the player can easily view the images or moving images.

<Volume control screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display means that the volume can be adjusted, and an image showing the currently set volume, volume adjustment method, and the like is displayed.
<Effect of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the volume can be adjusted.
(2) The player can easily adjust the volume.

<Display of light intensity adjustment screen>
The light amount adjustment screen display is a screen display on which an image showing the currently set light amount, the light amount adjustment method, and the like is displayed, indicating that the light amount can be adjusted.
<Effect of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the light amount can be adjusted.
(2) The amount of light can be easily adjusted by the player.

<Stage (direction stage)>
The stage (effect stage) is also called a mode (effect mode), and is an effect mode indicated by a background image.
<Effect of the stage (direction stage)>
(1) Display corresponding to the stage (first decorative pattern, notice, etc.) can be performed.

<Hidden mode (hidden stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is a production stage (production mode) in which it is unknown whether the game state is the probability variation game state or the non-probability variation game state.
<Effect of latent mode>
(1) It is possible to fuel whether or not the game is a probability variation game state.

<Tempai>
Tempai, also known as reach, reach state, the design row other than the design row scheduled to be stopped (temporary stop) at the end of the plurality of design rows has the same decorative design, and is planned to be stopped (temporary stop) at the end. Is a state in which the symbol sequence is fluctuating.
<Effect of tempai>
(1) It is possible to show that a winning is achieved when the same decorative design as the decorative design that is stopped in another design sequence is stopped in one further design sequence.

<Reach production>
The reach effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the variation, and is an effect that occurs mainly after the tempai. The reach production includes normal reach (normal reach production), super reach (super reach production, SP reach, SP reach production, super reach first half, super reach second half) and the like. Mainly, it is called the normal reach after the reach is established and before it reaches the super reach (or, if it does not become the super reach, until all the symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) after the reach is established). The production is called super reach (also called post-reach development production).
<Effect of reach production>
(1) The degree of expectation of the fluctuation can be suggested.

<Preliminary notice (preliminary notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, staging) mainly indicates the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation, but it is used as a suggestion that there is a hit in the hold (eg, pre-reading notice, look-ahead staging, etc.). There is also.
<Effect of notice (notice display, direction)>
(1) Whether or not the fluctuation is a hit can be encouraged.
(2) It is possible to fuel whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) means that the decoration pattern starts to change, and the decoration pattern appears to be temporarily stopped, but in reality, the decoration pattern is slightly moving (also referred to as shake fluctuation). There is) condition.
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It is possible to make it appear that the fluctuation is being executed a plurality of times.
(2) It is possible to fuel whether or not to make a fixed stop (in other words, whether to change again without making a fixed stop, or to hit without making a fixed stop).

<Pseudo run>
Pseudo-relation is sometimes referred to as re-variation in a broad sense, and is an effect that makes a decorative pattern appear to change multiple times in one variation.
<Effect of pseudo-relation>
(1) It is possible to make the decorative design appear to change multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo-relational design>
The pseudo-relational suggestion pattern is one of the special decorative patterns displayed when the pseudo rendition is generated or not.
<Effect of pseudo-relational suggestion pattern>
(1) It is possible to fuel whether or not pseudo-relation occurs.

<Pseudo run (re-variation) design>
The pseudo-relation (re-fluctuation) symbol is one of the special decorative symbols indicating that the pseudo-repetition (re-fluctuation) occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-rean (re-variation) design>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a pseudo link (re-variation) occurs.

<Development pattern>
The development symbol is one of special decorative symbols indicating that a reach effect is generated.
<Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the reach effect is generated.

<Pre-reading production>
The prefetch effect is an effect that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. The prefetching effect is executed on condition that the trigger hold has occurred (when it is determined to execute the prefetching effect for the generated hold).
<Effect of look-ahead production>
(1) It is possible to fuel whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Trigger hold>
The trigger hold is a hold that triggers the execution of the prefetching effect (it is determined to execute the prefetching effect for the generated hold).
<Effect of holding trigger>
(1) It is possible to execute the prefetching effect.
(2) It is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that a change will occur in the hold of the trigger.

<Right-handed instruction display>
The right-handed instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game starting opening or special winning opening is provided on the right side of the board, but it is mainly displayed in the time saving game state and indicates that right-handed execution should be performed. It is a display.
<Effect of right-handed instruction display>
(1) In a time saving game state, the player can be urged to execute a right-hand hit.

<Strike warning display (left striking warning display, right striking warning display)>
The hitting warning display is a display showing the recommended hitting method when the hitting method is different from the recommended hitting method in the current game state.
(1) It is possible to urge the player to execute a hitting manner corresponding to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode preset as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make the player easily recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect displayed on the effect display device for the image itself, the motion of the character in the moving image, the motion of the role object, and the like.
<Effect of effect display>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the object itself, the motion of a character in a moving image, the motion of a role object, or the like, which is a target.

<Full rotation production>
The full-rotation effect is a state in which the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is scrolling at a low speed while the symbols are aligned.
<Effect of full rotation production>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the variation is a hit.

<Promotion production>
The promotion effect is an effect that fuels whether or not a non-probability pattern is changed to a probability variation pattern, or whether it is changed from a low round (for example, 4R) to a high round (for example, 16R). It is a production. The promotion effect can occur not only during a change but also during a big hit. The promotion effect that fuels whether or not the non-probability variation pattern is changed to the probability variation pattern is also referred to as a probability variation promotion effect, and the promotion effect that fuels whether the change from low round per high round is referred to as round promotion performance.
<Effect of promotion production>
(1) Whether or not the non-probability variation pattern is changed to the probability variation pattern can be encouraged.
(2) It is possible to fuel whether or not to change from a low round to a high round.

<Reach voice>
The reach voice is a notice that indicates a hit expectation degree or the like by a sound generated when the reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established.
<Effect of reach voice>
(1) When the reach is reached, it is possible to suggest the hit expectancy and the like in combination with the image display and the accessory movement.

  FIG. 126 shows a display screen and a display priority which are displayed on the effect display device SG and are on standby for fluctuation. The broken line in the figure shows the situation where the object is not actually displayed, and shows the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is in a variable stop, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the variable stop (before the transition to a waiting movie to be described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , The second decorative symbol is also displayed in a stopped state at "437", the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is "0" It is displayed, and the display for the effect of the change is displayed (displayed when the first hold display is erased when the change is started, and is displayed until the end or the middle of the change ( When the next variation is started even after the display is finished, the production pending display of the variation corresponding to the next variation is displayed)), the first pending display of the first main game side, the second main gaming side The first hold display of is not displayed. The display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side is different from the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side, and the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side is The number indicating the number of holdings is outlined, and the display mode of the second holding display on the second main game side is such that the number indicating the number of holdings is not outlined. The display priority is: second decorative design> second hold display> first decorative design. The display priority may be the second hold display> the second decorative design> the first decorative design, and since the second decorative design and the second hold display do not overlap, the second decoration. Symbol = second hold display> first decorative symbol, may be satisfied.

  Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side, it is during fluctuation stop, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from fluctuation stop, in the non-time shortening game state. In the variable waiting screen display 1, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side that have been displayed are not displayed. Incidentally, as in the case of the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortening game state, the effect suspension display, the first main game side first hold display, and the second main game side first hold display are displayed. Not not. Here, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped, a waiting movie indicating that the fluctuation waiting (fluctuation stopped) is being displayed is displayed, and a part of the reach effect is used as the waiting movie. ing.

  In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state or the fluctuation waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, the effect pending display area of the fluctuation (the place where the effect pending of the fluctuation is displayed is displayed. Although the display has been described above and the first hold display area on the first main game side (the display for showing the place where the hold is displayed) has been described as a non-display, it may be configured to display these. For example, each display area may be divided and displayed as the effect pending display area of the variation and the first pending display area on the first main game side. Accordingly, it is possible to suggest that the display indicating the upper limit number of the first hold display and the effect display hold of the change are displayed even during the change standby (change stop). Also, in the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, like the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state (at the same position), the second decorative symbol, the second hold display (first Main game side, second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first hold display may not be displayed. Thereby, in the first hold display, the player cannot recognize the unchanging number, but in addition to the waiting movie, it can be recognized that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not changing, and the second pending It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the unchanging number can be recognized on the display.

  Next, the variation standby screen display 1 in the time reduction game state will be described. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side, it is in a variable stop, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the variable stop (before the transition to the waiting movie) It is displayed in a state of being stopped at "437" as the first decorative symbol, and is similarly displayed in a state of being stopped at "437" at the second decorative symbol, and the second hold display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and "→→ right hit →→" is displayed as the right hit instruction display, and the pending display for effect of the variation, the first main game The first hold display on the side and the first hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. Incidentally, as in the case of the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortening game state, the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side are different. In the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side, the number indicating the number of hold is omitted, and in the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side, the number indicating the number of hold is Not hollow out. The display priority is right hitting instruction display> second decorative design> second hold display> first decorative design. Note that the display priority may be right-handing instruction display> second hold display> second decorative design> first decorative design, and right-handing instruction display may be second decorative design and second holding display. Since there is no overlapping, right-handed instruction display> second decorative design = second hold display> first decorative design may be satisfied.

  Next, the variation standby screen display 2 in the time reduction game state will be described. Currently, during the fluctuation stop, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol that are displayed in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time shortening game state. , The second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. Incidentally, as in the case of the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortening game state, the effect suspension display, the first main game side first hold display, and the second main game side first hold display are displayed. Not not. Further, as in the case of the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced game state, a standby movie indicating that the variable standby (variable stop) is being performed is displayed when the predetermined period has passed since the variable stop. The waiting movie is the same as the waiting movie displayed on the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortening game state.

  It should be noted that, in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time shortened gaming state or the fluctuation waiting screen display 2 in the time shortened gaming state, the effect pending display area of the fluctuation (to indicate the location where the effect pending of the fluctuation is displayed. Although the display) and the first hold display area (display for indicating the place where the hold is displayed) on the second main game side are not displayed, they may be displayed. For example, each display area may be divided and displayed as the effect pending display area of the variation and the first pending display area on the second main game side. As a result, even during the time shortening game, it is possible to suggest displaying the effect pending display of the variation, and it is possible to easily recognize the number of the first pending display on the second main game side. Also, in the variable waiting screen display 2 in the time shortening game state, like the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time shortening game state (at the same position), the second decorative symbol, the second hold display (first main game) Side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first hold display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanging number in the first hold display, but can recognize that the second decorative symbol is not changing in addition to the waiting movie, and the unchanging number in the second hold display. The number can be recognized.

  Incidentally, it is possible to have various screen display configurations other than the above-mentioned screen display configuration, for example, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state and the variable standby screen display in the time reduced game state. In 1, the first main game side of the second hold display and the second main game side of the second hold display is not displayed, or in the non-time reduction game state, the first main game side of the hold and the second main game If there is no hold on the side and a predetermined period of time has passed, it is possible to shift from the variable standby screen display 1 to the variable standby screen display 2, but in the time saving game state, the variable standby screen display 1 is displayed. , The first main game side is not held and the second main game side is not held, and even if a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable standby screen display 1 does not shift to the variable standby screen display 2. Good.

  Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The broken line in the figure shows the situation where the object is not actually displayed, and shows the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time reduction game state will be described. In the non-time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (change stop) or fluctuation. The volume is adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, displaying the sub-input button indicating ending the volume adjustment screen, displaying an image that makes the screen semi-transparent) is displayed When the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen ends. In the non-time-shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variation stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side is displayed. The volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap with all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen may overlap with the first decorative design but may not overlap with the second decorative design. Accordingly, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which the visibility is particularly desired to be secured. If it is fluctuating in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, the production hold of the fluctuation If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller during fluctuation than during fluctuation waiting (stopping fluctuation). , For example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display of volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input indicating termination of volume adjustment screen) The display of the button SB and the display of the image which makes the screen semi-transparent are each reduced), or only the display showing the volume, or the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume and the volume adjusting method. It is good to use only two combinations of . When only the display showing the volume or only the combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 showing the volume adjusting method is used, the display mode may be the same as the display state during the fluctuation standby (change stop), , They may be different (for example, the shapes are different, or the shapes are the same but are reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may not overlap. Further, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may not overlap with the changing second decorative pattern but may overlap with the changing first decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. The volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the change, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is: second decorative pattern> second hold display> volume adjustment screen> first decorative pattern> first hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). Incidentally, the display priority is, even if the second decorative design = second hold display, the second decorative design <second hold display, the first decorative design <first hold display (and the effect production hold display) good. When a button operation relating to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is displayed, the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

  Next, the volume adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (variation stop) or fluctuation. If it is in a variation standby (variation stop) in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, right strike The instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping with all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen may overlap with the first decorative design but may not overlap with the second decorative design. Accordingly, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which the visibility is particularly desired to be secured. If it is fluctuating in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, the effect hold display If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handing instruction display are displayed, and although not shown, the volume adjustment screen is displayed smaller than during fluctuation waiting (stopping fluctuation). Is preferable, and for example, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may not overlap. For example, the volume adjustment screen during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) is simply reduced (display of the volume, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method, sub-input button indicating termination of the volume adjustment screen). The display of SB and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent are each reduced), or only the display showing the volume, or the display showing the volume and the cross-shaped button SB-2 showing the volume adjusting method may be displayed. Only two combinations may be used. When only the display showing the volume or only the combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 showing the volume adjusting method is used, the display mode may be the same as the display state during the fluctuation standby (change stop), , They may be different (for example, the shapes are different, or the shapes are the same but are reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may not overlap. Further, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may not overlap with the changing second decorative pattern but may overlap with the changing first decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. The volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the change, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is right hitting instruction display> second decorative pattern> second hold display> volume adjustment screen> first decorative pattern> first hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). In addition, the display priority is a right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative design, second decorative design> second hold display> right-handed instruction display, second hold display> second decorative design> right-handed instruction display , May be further used, and the second decorative symbol = second reserved display, first decorative symbol <first reserved display (and display for effect of the variation).

  Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-time reduction game state will be described. In the non-time shortening game state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variation standby (variation stop). The light amount is adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the light intensity adjustment screen (display indicating the light intensity, cross button indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button indicating the exit of the light intensity adjustment screen, and the image display that makes the screen semi-transparent) is displayed When the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the light amount adjustment screen ends. In the non-time-shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variation stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side is displayed. The light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap with all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with part of the display. If it is fluctuating in the non-time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, the production hold of the fluctuation If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen smaller than that during a change standby (change stop). , For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display of light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input indicating termination of the light intensity adjustment screen) The display of the button SB and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent are each reduced), or only the display showing the light amount, or the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the light amount and the light amount adjusting method It is good to use only two combinations of . When only the display showing the light amount or only two combinations of the display showing the light amount and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the light amount adjusting method are used, the display mode may be the same as the display mode during the fluctuation standby (change stop), , They may be different (for example, the shapes are different, or the shapes are the same but are reduced). Moreover, you may comprise so that a light quantity adjustment screen and a 2nd decorative design may not overlap. Further, the small light amount adjustment screen may be configured not to overlap with the changing second decorative design but to overlap with the changing first decorative design. Accordingly, the light amount adjustment screens can be configured to be overlapped, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, the production hold of the fluctuation If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. The light amount may be adjusted during the change, and the light amount may be adjusted when the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated without displaying the light amount adjustment screen during the change. The adjustment screen may be displayed. The display priority is: second decorative pattern> second hold display> light quantity adjustment screen> first decorative pattern> first hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). Incidentally, the display priority is, even if the second decorative design = second hold display, the second decorative design <second hold display, the first decorative design <first hold display (and the effect production hold display) good. If a button operation related to the light amount adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is displayed, the display of the standby movie is ended and the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed.

  Next, the light amount adjustment in the time reduction game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variation standby (variation stop). If it is in a variation standby (variation stop) in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, right strike The instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping with all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen may overlap with the first decorative design but may not overlap with the second decorative design. For example, a light amount adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (change stop) is simply reduced (a display showing the light amount, a cross button SB-2 showing the light amount adjusting method is displayed, and a sub-input button showing the end of the light amount adjustment screen. The display of SB and the display of the image which makes the screen semi-transparent are each reduced), or only the display showing the light amount, or the display of the light amount and the cross-shaped button SB-2 showing the light amount adjusting method may be displayed. Only two combinations may be used. When only the display showing the light amount or only two combinations of the display showing the light amount and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the light amount adjusting method are used, the display mode may be the same as the display mode during the fluctuation standby (change stop), , They may be different (for example, the shapes are different, or the shapes are the same but are reduced). Moreover, you may comprise so that a light quantity adjustment screen and a 2nd decorative design may not overlap. Further, the small light amount adjustment screen may be configured not to overlap with the changing second decorative design but to overlap with the changing first decorative design. Accordingly, the light amount adjustment screens can be configured to be overlapped, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is fluctuating in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display of the first main game side, the second hold display of the second main game side, the effect hold display If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right hitting instruction display are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. The light amount may be adjusted during the change, and the light amount may be adjusted when the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated without displaying the light amount adjustment screen during the change. The adjustment screen may be displayed. The display priority is: right-handed instruction display> second decorative pattern> second hold display> light intensity adjustment screen> first decorative pattern> first hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). In addition, the display priority is a right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative design, second decorative design> second hold display> right-handed instruction display, second hold display> second decorative design> right-handed instruction display , May be further used, and the second decorative symbol = second reserved display, first decorative symbol <first reserved display (and display for effect of the variation).

  Next, screen display during normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. The broken line in the figure shows the situation where the object is not actually displayed, and shows the display location when the object is displayed. First, the normal variable screen display in the non-time shortening game state will be described. Currently, it is changing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, the second on the second main game side. 2 Hold display "0", production hold display of the variation, first hold display on the first main game side (two pieces), and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Absent. Incidentally, in the screen display during normal fluctuation in the non-time shortening game state, when there is a ball entering the second main game starting opening B10, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second main game side second display. The hold display is counted up (added), and when the variable ball related to the hold on the second main game side is started, the first hold display on the second main game side is decremented by 1, and the second hold on the second main game side is made. The display is configured to count down (subtract). Specifically, at present, there are two holds on the first main game side, two first hold displays on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the first main game side is "2", The first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a new ball enters the second main game starting opening B10. Then, one first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second hold display on the second main game side is updated and displayed from "0" to "1". The display priority is a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> main area (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol)> effect pending display of the variation> The first hold display on the first main game side> the first hold display on the second main game side. The display priority may be a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) <second reserved display, a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) = second reserved display, or the main area. The display priority of (variable display of the first decorative design, temporary stop display of the first decorative design) may be set to the lowest of these, and the first hold display on the first main game side <second main game The first hold display on the side, the first hold display on the first main game side = the first hold display on the second main game side, may be used.

  Next, the normal changing screen display in the time shortening game state will be described. Currently, it is changing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "0" of the first main game side, the second of the second main game side 2 Hold display "2", production hold display of the fluctuation, first hold display (2 pieces) on the second main game side, right-handing instruction display, are displayed, and first hold on the first main game side The display is not displayed. Incidentally, in the screen display during normal change in the time shortening game state, the first hold display of the first main game side is not displayed even if there is a ball entering the first main game starting opening A10, but the first main game side The second hold display is configured to count up. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> main area (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol)> of the variation The effect hold display> the first hold display on the second main game side. The display priority may be a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) <second reserved display, a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) = second reserved display, or the main area. The display priority of (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest of these, and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed. , Production of the fluctuation display for the first display> the first hold display of the first main game side> the first hold display of the second main game side, or the display display for the production of the fluctuation> first hold of the second main game side The display may be a first hold display on the first main game side.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the characteristic configuration shown in FIG.

  In the non-time-reduced game state (state without electric support state), the hold display on the first main game side is displayed in the display mode of "●" as the first hold display. On the other hand, in the time-reduced game state (state accompanied by electric support state), the hold display on the second main game side is displayed in the display mode of "heart (filled)" as the first hold display. Further, the second hold display is the same regardless of whether it is in the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state, but the second hold display on the first main game side is the "outlined number". This is a display mode, and the second hold display on the second main game side is a display mode of "filled numbers". It should be noted that the difference between the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side is indicated by not only hollowing or filling, but also by different numbers of colors. You may comprise.

  In addition, in the case of the configuration of the starting opening that alternately enters the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 (see the fifth embodiment), the first holding on the first main gaming side The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first hold display on the second main game side may be the same, and the first hold on the first main game side and the non-time shortened game state or the time shortened game state, You may comprise so that the 1st hold display of the 2nd main game side may be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize which of the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 the player has entered.

  In the main area, in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, the first decorative pattern uses the entire effect display device SG, and scroll display moves from top to bottom (specifically, 1 → 2 → ... While scrolling in the order of →→ 7 → 8 → ・ ・ ・ 1 → ..., the first decorative symbols displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed, and temporary stop → fixed stop is performed in the order of left and right. ) Is performed, but in the sub-region, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the left column, the middle column, and the right column as if it is fluctuating on the spot at the lower right of the effect display device SG (that is, effect). (Variable display that does not appear to move from top to bottom using the entire display device SG, but appears to move from top to bottom in only some display areas).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time reduction game state, the effect production hold display and the first main game side first hold display are displayed in the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, The effect display device SG is configured to display an effect pending display and a first main game pending display on the second main game side at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and the player is currently playing mainly with which starting opening. The display mode of the first hold display that is displayed in the lower left (whether the first main game starting opening A10 is the main in the non-time shortening game state, the second main game starting opening B10 is the main in the time shortening game state) ("● "Or" heart (fill) "), or the display position of the first hold display on the first main game side or the first hold display on the second main game side (in the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side is displayed first). 1 Hold display is displayed at the bottom left of the effect display device SG, Shortened when gaming state it is possible to grasp by to), displayed in the lower left corner of the first hold display is effect display device SG of the second main player side. The display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether they are in the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state. Is.

Here, a first hold display on the first main game side, a first hold display on the second main game side, and a second hold on the first main game side that can be displayed during fluctuations in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state The display patterns of the hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side will be described in detail below, including modification examples.
(1) 1st hold display (1-1) non-time reduction In the game state, only the 1st hold display of the 1st main game side is displayed (the 1st hold display of the 2nd main game side is not displayed), the time reduction In the gaming state, only the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time reduction game state, the first hold display of the first main game side and the first hold display of the second main game side are displayed, and in the time reduction game state, the second main game side Only one hold display is displayed (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time reduction game state, only the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed), and in the time reduction game state, the first main display The first hold display on the game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second hold display In both the non-time shortened game state and the time shortened game state, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. .

  The first hold display area on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the area in which the effect hold display for the variation is displayed are collectively referred to as the first hold display area, and the first main game side The area where the second hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as the second hold display area. Supplementally, unlike the first hold display area, in the second hold display area, the display corresponding to the change display of the change such as the effect hold display of the change is not performed. In other words, the second hold display for indicating that it is changing is not additionally displayed, and only the number of hold (unchanged number) is displayed until the user gets tired.

  The effect pending display of the change has the same display mode regardless of whether the change is on the first main game side or the second main game side. Specifically, if it is a non-time shortening game state, even if it is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, it is larger than the first hold display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and is in the time shortening game state, whether it is the fluctuation of the first main game side or the fluctuation of the second main game side, the first hold display of the second main game side is displayed. It is displayed as a large "heart" (fill). In addition, the production suspension display of the variation can be displayed only in the variation of the first main game side (when the variation start condition of the first main game side is satisfied) in the non-time shortened game state {that is, It is not displayed in the variation of the second main game side (when the variation start condition of the second main game side is satisfied)}, and if it is a time shortening game state, the variation of the second main game side (second main It can be displayed only when the variation start condition of the game side is satisfied) (that is, it is not displayed when the variation start condition of the first main game side is satisfied (when the variation start condition of the first main game side is satisfied)). Good. Further, as an effect according to the degree of expectation of the change, the display mode of the effect pending display of the change may be changed, and for example, the color may change (default color (here, filled black) → red, Etc.) or the shape may change (default shape (here, the first main game side is “round”, the second main game is “heart”) → ☆, etc.), and the number of patterns in the display mode In the non-time shortening game state, the number of patterns in the variation on the first main game side (for example, a pattern of a total of 6 colors of default color, blue, yellow, green, red, iridescent is provided. The default color <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color) is provided with the number of patterns in the variation on the second main game side (for example, a default color, a red color, and a rainbow color, three color patterns in total). Expectation is default color <red <rainbow , And the number of patterns in the fluctuation of the second main game side (for example, a pattern of a total of 6 colors of default color, blue, yellow, green, red, iridescent) in the time shortening game state. The winning expectation is that the default color <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color) is the number of patterns in the fluctuation of the first main game side (for example, default color, red, iridescent color). It has a pattern of 3 colors, and the hit expectation is higher than the default color <red <rainbow.). The same relationship of the number of patterns may be adopted for the undigested hold (first hold display).

  The display priorities of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows: second hold display> first hold display, and when both hold displays are displayed even when not normally changing, The display priority of the second hold display is set higher than the display priority of the first hold display. For example, when a notice image (displayed on the entire screen such as a notice next time), SP reach, first decorative pattern, etc. is displayed, second hold display> notice image (or SP reach, first decorative pattern, etc.) > The first hold display is displayed.

Whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be overlapped and whether or not the first hold display and the second hold display can be overlapped are as follows, including modified examples (FIGS. 126, 128, etc. as necessary). See).
(1) Whether the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be overlapped (1-1) The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are overlapped during the variation standby (change stop) (due to the display priority, the overlapping portion is , The second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design), the stop display position of the first decorative design and the second decorative design is defined (not shown).
(1-2) During the variation standby (variation stop), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern do not overlap, and during the variation, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern overlap (due to the display priority, overlapping). As for the portion, the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design) so that the stop display position of the first decorative design and the second decorative design is determined.
For example, if it is a non-time-reduced game state, it may have a configuration of (1-1), and if it is a time-reduced game state, it may have a configuration of (1-2). The configuration of (2) may be adopted and the configuration of (1-1) may be adopted even in the time reduction game state.
(2) Whether or not the first hold display and the second hold display can be overlapped. In both cases of changing standby (change stop) and changing, the first hold display (first hold display on the first main game side, second The 1st hold display and the 2nd hold display so that the 1st hold display on the main game side) and the 2nd hold display (the 2nd hold display on the 1st main game side, the 2nd hold display on the 2nd main game side) do not overlap. The display position with the hold display is defined. It can be applied even during the fixed stop.

Whether the first decorative pattern and the first hold display can overlap, whether the second decorative pattern and the second hold display can overlap, whether the first decorative pattern and the second hold display can overlap, the second decorative pattern and the first hold display The duplication availability is as follows.
(A) Non-time-reduced game state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first reserved symbol can be overlapped In both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable state, the first decorative symbol and the first reserved symbol are displayed. The display positions of the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined so that they overlap (due to the display priority, the overlapping portion displays the first decorative design before the first reserved display).
(1) ′ Whether or not the first decorative design and the first reserved display can overlap In any of the changing standby (variable stop) and the changing, the first decorative design and the first reserved display overlap (depending on the display priority, In the overlapping portion, the display positions of the first decorative symbol and the first reserved symbol are determined so that the first reserved symbol is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display can be overlapped. Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap with each other during the fluctuation standby (change stop) and during the fluctuation, with the second decorative design. The display position of the second hold display is defined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display can be overlapped. In any of the fluctuation standby (change stop) and the fluctuation, the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display overlap (depending on the display priority, an overlapping portion). Is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern), the display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display are determined.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display can be overlapped With each other, during the variation standby (change stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap with the second decorative design. The display position of the first hold display is determined. In the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display are determined to overlap at least during the change, and in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol and the second reserved display are the same. It is set to overlap at least during fluctuation, and may be set to overlap or not to overlap during game standby.
(B) Time-saving game state (1) Whether or not the first decorative design and the first hold display can overlap In any of the changing standby (change stop) and the changing, the first decorative design and the first hold display overlap. In order not to do so, the display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first hold display are set. In addition, it may be configured to rarely overlap (which is less frequent than the non-time reduction game state) during the fluctuation.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display can be overlapped. Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap with each other during the fluctuation standby (change stop) and during the fluctuation, with the second decorative design. The display position of the second hold display is defined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display can be overlapped With the first decorative pattern so that the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display do not overlap with each other during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is defined. In addition, it may be configured to rarely overlap (which is less frequent than the non-time reduction game state) during the fluctuation.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display can be overlapped With each other, during the variation standby (change stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap with the second decorative design. The display position of the first hold display is determined.

  Next, screen display during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. 129. First, the screen display 1 during SP reach in the non-time shortening game state will be described. Currently in SP reach, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, the second hold display "0" on the second main game side, of the change The production hold display is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (however, until hold 4) and the second main game starting opening B10. When a game ball is entered in, the second hold display on the second main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4). The first hold display can be displayed after returning to the normal stage screen (flat level stage screen or the like) which is in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state after the end of SP reach. The first hold display will be displayed including the amount of balls entered during the reach. Specifically, if the number of holdings increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first holding display is not displayed during SP reaching, but three first holding displays are displayed when returning to the normal stage screen. Of. The display priority is: sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> hold display for effect of the change> SP reach effect.

  Next, the screen display 2 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently in SP reach, the character YK has moved to the front of the effect display device SG, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, The second hold display “0” on the second main game side, the production hold display of the variation is displayed, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed. It has not been. The effect pending display of the variation may be configured not to be displayed.

  In this way, under specific circumstances (during SP reach, during role operation, promotion effect (effect that promotes whether or not to promote from odd symbol that is a non-probability variation symbol to odd symbol that is a probability variation symbol), error screen is displayed, etc. }, By making the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side not displayed, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the SP reach. Incidentally, even during SP reach, it may be configured to display the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side. In this case, the first decoration in the main area The variable display of the symbols is preferably displayed small in the upper right corner of the effect display device SG (almost the same size as the variable display of the second decorative symbols or slightly larger than the variable display of the first decorative symbols), and the main area By displaying the variable display of the first decorative symbol in, it is possible to show the reach mode (for example, "4 ↓ 4") and the reach pattern (for example, display only one "4") to the player. Become. The display priority is: sub area (variable display of the second decorative pattern)> second hold display> hold display for effect of the change> liquid crystal effect {effect display (in FIG. 129, star-shaped accessory YK has dropped) Occasionally, it is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes the object appear to shine shiny above the fall position).

  Next, the update of the first hold display and the second hold display will be described with reference to FIG. First, the fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation is stopped in the state where there are two holdings on the first main game side. Next, a new fluctuation on the first main game side has just started, and the first hold display on the first main game side starts shifting the display position (shift animation starts) and the second on the first main game side. The hold display is subtracted from "2" to "1" immediately after the start of fluctuation. Next, before the shift of the first reserved display on the first main game side is completed, a game ball has newly entered the first main game starting opening A10, and the first ball corresponding to the new entry The hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) in which the first hold display on the main game side is incremented by one is performed, and the second hold display on the first main game side is changed from "1" to " It is 2 ".

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the characteristic configuration shown in FIG.

  When a new hold occurs (when a new game ball enters the starting opening), the execution time (eg, 1000 ms) of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display (from the lower part of the effect display device SG) The hold appears gradually and appears in a fixed position (where N-th hold is displayed) to be displayed. The time from the appearance start to the display completion is 1000 ms}, and the update time of the second hold display ( They are addition time and subtraction time, and are configured to be longer than, for example, 100 ms. In addition, the execution time (for example, 1500 ms) of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display (the hold displayed at the place where the Nth hold is displayed is moved, and the N−1th hold is performed. It is an effect that moves to the place where the hold is displayed, and then fits into the fixed position (where the N-1th hold is displayed) and is displayed, and the time from the start of movement to the completion of display (movement completion) is 1500 ms}. Is configured to be longer than the update time of the second hold display. Further, the update time of the second hold display is shorter than the variation fixed time (for example, the variation fixed time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms, the variation fixed time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and the shortest variation. It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

  Immediately after the start of fluctuation, the first hold display can display the shift display (shift animation) and the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) simultaneously (overlapping) {that is, the first hold display is the hold When the execution of shift display (shift animation) is started during execution of occurrence display (hold occurrence animation), the pending occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is displayed without interruption of the pending occurrence occurrence display (hold occurrence animation). If the shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time, and the execution of the hold occurrence display (hold animation) is started during the execution of the shift display (shift animation), the shift display in progress (shift animation) ) Display without interruption (shift animation) and hold occurrence display (hold) Cause animation) and is capable of executing at the same time. }, However, it is impossible to display subtraction and addition at the same time in the second hold display, and after the subtraction display (due to fluctuation start) is performed, the addition display (due to entry into the starting opening) is performed. It will be. When the number of holdings increases immediately before the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation starts, the second holding display is such that the added display (due to the fluctuation start) and the subtracted display (due to the fluctuation start) are performed. It should be noted that both subtraction and addition require the time required for this update display (for example, update from “2” to “1” or update from “1” to “2”). The required time) is 100 ms.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the prefetch effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of “(1) change in blue hold” will be described. First, in the state where there are four reservations, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, and there are four holds due to a new ball entry, and the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is blue hold. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the blue suspension is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is lost (“861”), and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the change corresponding to the blue hold is started, and the blue hold is displayed as a production hold display (blue) of the change. It should be noted that, when the variation starts with the blue hold, the variation time that is shorter than that when the variation starts with the red hold is likely to be selected (in other words, the variation time with a low expectation of hitting is easily selected). Next, the first decorative pattern is in a specific reach mode (here, 7-reach, and 7-reach has higher jackpot expectation than other reach (eg, 2-reach)) (No. 2 The decorative pattern does not become a specific reach mode, and the variable display is continued), but when the fluctuation start is in blue hold, the specific reach mode is more than that in the red hold described later. The probability of becoming is low. Next, although the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) where the winning is a win, when the fluctuation starts in the blue hold, it changes in the red hold. The probability of being in a specific final display mode is lower than in the case of starting. Next, the case of “(2) Red pending change” will be described. The basic flow is the same as “(1) Blue hold change”, but the display mode of the prefetch effect (hold change effect) is different. First, in the state where there are four reservations, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, and there are four holds due to a new ball entry, and the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is red hold. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the red suspension is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is lost (“861”) and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the change corresponding to the red hold is started, and the red hold is displayed as the effect hold display (red) of the change. It should be noted that, when the fluctuation starts with the red hold, it is easier to select a longer fluctuation time than when the fluctuation starts with the blue hold (in other words, the fluctuation time with a high expectation of hitting is easily selected). Next, the first decorative pattern is in a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern is not in a specific reach mode, and the variable display is continued), but in red hold When the fluctuation starts, the probability of being in the specific reach mode is higher than when the fluctuation starts with blue hold. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but when the fluctuation starts in the red hold, it changes in the blue hold. The probability of being in a specific final display mode is higher than in the case of starting. As an example, the probability of reaching reach in blue hold is 90% of the change related to blue hold, the probability of reaching reach in red hold is 99% of the change related to red hold, and the difference is 9%. Is. In addition, the probability of being in a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) in blue hold is 5% of the case of reaching due to the change related to blue hold, and the specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) in red hold. The probability of becoming is 30% of the case of reach due to fluctuations related to red reservation. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of reaching is set high for both blue hold and red hold, and the difference is set so that it does not increase, and the probability of reaching a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set not so high. And it is desirable that the difference be large. As a result, the degree of expectation of reaching by the change of the hold is secured to some extent, but by setting the difference in the degree of expectation of the subsequent development (which number will reach), the first hold display The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be complicated. Note that these numerical values (percentages) are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable that they have such a magnitude relationship.

  In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the reach mode, the second decorative pattern may be in the reach mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a relationship between the number of holdings and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) number of holdings 1" will be described. First, in the state where there is one hold, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, fluctuations have begun. In the case where the fluctuation starts when the number of holdings is 1, the longer fluctuation time is easily selected than when the fluctuation starts when the number of holdings is 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode, and the variable display is continued), but the specific reach The probability of being in the form is the same or a slight difference regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but the probability of becoming the specific final display mode is regardless of the number of reservations. Same or slightly different. Next, the case of “(2) the number of reservations 4” will be described. The flow at the time of change is omitted because it is the same as “(1) Number of holdings 1”, but when the number of holdings 4 starts changing, a shorter changing time is selected than when the number of holdings 1 starts changing. It is easy to be beaten. Further, as described in the description of "(1) Number of reserved 1", the first decorative pattern is a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (if the second decorative pattern is a specific reach mode). However, the variable display is continued), but the probability of being in a specific reach mode is the same or a slight difference regardless of the number of reservations, and further, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are specific hits. Although the final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed, the probability of a specific final display mode is the same or a slight difference regardless of the number of reservations.

  In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the reach mode, the second decorative pattern may be in the reach mode.

  Next, the relationship between the game state and the final display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 133. First, the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, in the state where there is one hold, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the variation is started, and the first decorative pattern becomes the reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not reach the reach mode and the variable display is continued), and finally the first decoration Although the design and the second decorative pattern are final display modes showing the hit mode, as the final display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, other than the pattern alignment (for example, "777"), the latent mode It is configured such that a mode transition pattern (for example, a “latent” pattern) indicating that the transition to is can be displayed. Next, the time reduction game state will be described. The explanation of the flow of fluctuation is omitted because it is the same as the non-time reduction game state. In the time shortening game state, the first display pattern and the second display pattern are the final display mode showing the hit mode is only the pattern alignment (for example, "777"), and the mode transition pattern indicating the transition to the latent mode. Is configured not to be displayed. That is, the number of candidates for the final display mode is provided in the non-time-reduced game state more than in the time-reduced game state for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. By configuring in this way, in the case of hit from the non-time-reduced game state, it has various game characteristics by including the transition to the latent mode, and in the case of hit from the time-reduced game state, it does not include the transition to the latent mode. The game state can be recognized by the player, that is, the game play can be simple and clear during the holiday cottage. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (again, 7-reach with high expectation is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-time-reduced gaming state, and one-third of each appears as an example. On the other hand, there are "787" and "777" in the time-reduced game state, and as an example, it is configured to appear 1/2 each, and in the time-reduced game state, the probability of being out of position is reduced to reach 7 reach. In the case of, it is possible to restrict the middle symbol from coming off without reaching 7, and it is possible to increase the degree of expectation more than the non-time-reduced gaming state.

  Incidentally, in the non-time shortening game state, as the final display mode showing the hit mode, in the first decorative symbol, a mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the latent mode can be displayed, but in the second decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol The mode transition pattern displayed in the symbol cannot be displayed, and the configuration may be such that it shifts to the latent mode in a different final display mode. For example, in the second decorative symbol, "357" and "246" are displayed. In addition, it may be configured to display a combination of odd-numbered symbols and a combination of even-numbered symbols, and the combination of odd-numbered symbols may be configured to have a higher probability of being in a probability variation state in the latent mode than a combination of even-numbered symbols. ..

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the relationship between the game state and the hitting warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) will be described. First, the hitting warning display in the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, in the state where there is one hold on the first main game side, it is in a fluctuation stop state. Here, there is no display indicating how to hit the player. Next, when a game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10, the first main display side of the second main game side and the second hold display side of the second main game side are updated, and a left-handed warning is issued. The display is performed until the end condition (for example, 10 seconds, entering the first main game start opening A10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice together with the left-handed warning display (for example, "left-handed hit". Please × 3 times). The left-handed warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to display it at a position that is easily recognized by the player, but may overlap with the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display. It is configured not to be displayed. In addition, even if the first main game start opening A10 is entered in the non-time shortening game state and the first main game side first hold display and the first main game side second hold display are updated, left-handed No warning is displayed. Next, the hitting warning display in the time reduction game state will be described. First, in the state where there is one hold on the second main game side, it is in a fluctuation stop state. Here, a right-handing instruction display (“→→ right-handing →→”), which is a display indicating how to hit the player, is displayed. The right-handing instruction display (“→→ right-handing →→”) is displayed in the time-saving game state, and does not depend on the update display of the number of holdings (for example, addition of the second holding display), and shortens the time. If it is in a game state, it is continuously displayed. Next, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed), and further , The right-handed warning display is performed until an end condition (for example, entering the second main game starting opening B10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice together with the right-handed warning display (for example, "right-handed please"). The right-handed warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to display it at a position easily recognized by the player, but it may overlap with the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display. It is configured not to be displayed. It should be noted that even if the player enters the second main game starting opening B10 in the time shortening game state and updates the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side, a right-handed warning is issued. No display is done. It is to be noted that, without displaying the hitting warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) on the effect display device SG, a voice warning (“please right-handed”, “please left-handed”) is output. It may be configured to be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the relationship between the prefetch effect and the probability (revariation probability) of displaying the pseudo continuous symbol will be described. First, the flow of the effect will be described using the case of “blue hold change → re-change (pseudo continuous)”. First, there are three holdings on the side of the first main game, and the first first holding display is displayed in blue holding, and is in a fluctuation stop state. Next, when the fluctuation due to the blue hold is started (blue is displayed as the effect pending display of the fluctuation), “6” is displayed in the left column and “7” is displayed in the right column, and the pseudo-link suggestion is made. As a notice, a pseudo-relational pattern (here, non-transparent “NEXT”) that is semi-transparent is a pseudo-relational suggestive pattern (here, semi-transparent “NEXT”) that is below the effect display device SG. Is scrolled to. Next, the pseudo-relational suggestion pattern is scroll-displayed to the approximate center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-representative pattern indicating that the pseudo-relation occurs is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-relational symbols have stopped, next, the symbols are changed again in all symbol columns, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. As the first decorative pattern, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-relational symbol can be displayed, but as the second decorative symbol, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-relational symbol are not displayed. Next, the display mode of the prefetch effect (hold change effect) (in this example, blue hold change, red hold change) and the probability of displaying the pseudo continuous symbol will be described. As described above, when the pseudo-relational symbol is displayed, a pseudo-repetition that is a re-change occurs, but the probability that the pseudo-relational symbol is displayed is configured to be different depending on the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect). Also, for example, the probability of re-fluctuation (probability of occurrence of pseudo-relation) is low in blue hold with low hit expectancy, and the probability of re-fluctuation is high in red hold with high hit expectation (that is, The probability of re-variation may be configured such that (red hold> blue hold). In the above, the case where the pseudo symbol suggestive symbol and the pseudo symbol are displayed from the display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same (not reach) is explained, but the invention is not limited to this, and the left symbol and the right symbol are In addition to the configuration in which the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-relational symbol are displayed from the same reach display, the first decorative symbol can be changed (pseudo-repeated), the second decorative symbol can also be changed (pseudo-reduced symbol). ) Possible configurations, the pseudo-relational pattern may be a specific symbol (for example, "7"), and the symbol row in which the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-relational symbol are displayed is a left column or a right column. It may be. Further, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the middle symbol column (substantially the center of the effect display device SG), the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) without scrolling. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-relation) is performed, and in this case, the pseudo-relational pattern is scrolled and displayed so as to be displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (substantially the center of the effect display device SG). You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the pseudo-relation is performed while the probability that the pseudo-relational symbol is displayed during the prefetching effect display (revariation probability) and the trigger variation (the variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the prefetching effect). The relationship between the symbols displayed (probability of re-variation) will be described. First, in the state where there are two reservations, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the background is displayed in semitransparent black, which is a display mode with a high expectation of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when the high-expectation display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-relational symbol may not be displayed, and the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-repetition symbol may be displayed. May be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, continuously, the background is displayed in semi-transparent black, and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the trigger variation is started, and the background is the normal background (not translucent black). Next, in a state where "6" is displayed in the left column and "7" is displayed in the right column, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbols are scroll-displayed from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG. Next, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol is scroll-displayed to the approximate center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-representative symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-relational symbols have stopped, next, the symbols are changed again in all symbol columns, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. In this way, in the change related to the hold before the change related to the hold (so-called trigger change) that triggered the occurrence of the look-ahead effect, a display mode with a high expectation (here, a semi-transparent display mode) is displayed as the display mode of the look-ahead effect. A black background) can be displayed, but the pseudo-relational pattern is not displayed and re-variation (pseudo-relation) does not occur, or when the display mode of the prefetching effect is a display mode with high expectation, the prefetching effect is displayed. May be configured so that the probability that re-variation (pseudo-relation) will be displayed and the pseudo-relational pattern is displayed is lower than when the display mode of the is low expectation degree, and in the trigger variation, high expectation of the look-ahead effect Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol and the pseudo-relational symbol can be displayed, re-variation (pseudo-relationship) can occur, or pseudo-relationship than the variation related to the hold before the trigger variation. The pattern is displayed and re-changed (pseudo series) There may be configured such that the probability of occurrence is high. Further, the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the middle symbol column (substantially the center of the effect display device SG), the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) without scrolling. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-relation) is performed, and in this case, the pseudo-relational pattern is scrolled and displayed so as to be displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (substantially the center of the effect display device SG). You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the decorative pattern after power-off and power-off recovery (when not RAM clear. That is, when S1002 → S1008 → S1010 → S1012 → S1014 → ... in FIG. 5). The relationship will be described. First, (A) will be described. First, since the player is staying on stage A (while the movement is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after power is turned off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed, as before the power was turned off. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before and after power-off, etc., and is displayed here as “861”. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the player is staying on stage B (moving stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. Unlike before the power was turned off, "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Next, (C) which is a modified example of (A) will be described. First, the user is staying on stage A (while the fluctuation is stopped), and the first decorative pattern is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the power is turned off, the stage A set as the default stage is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is "2 (ally)" which is the default display when the power is turned off, unlike before the power is turned off. "4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" are displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Although only the first decorative pattern is changed here, if the power is cut off during the stay in the stage B to recover, the default stage is the stage A, the first decoration when the power is restored. It returns with "2 (friend), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" which is the default display of the symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship of the decorative symbols after power-off and power-off recovery (when RAM is cleared. When S1002 → S1004 → S1006 → ... in FIG. 5) is described. First, (A) will be described. First, since the player is staying on stage A (while the movement is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, when RAM is cleared, the power is restored, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. Unlike before power-off, the default display of the first decorative pattern when RAM is cleared is "3 (penguin)". 3 (penguin), 1 (chick) ”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before and after power-off, etc., and is displayed here as "331". Next, (B) will be described. First, since the player is staying on stage B (moving stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" by a numeral. Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the power is turned off by clearing the RAM, and the stage A set as the default stage is displayed. Unlike the state before the power is turned off, the default display of the first decorative pattern at the time of clearing the RAM is "3 (penguin ), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick) ”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "331" by a numeral.

  In this way, when the RAM is cleared (RAM is cleared and the power is restored), a predetermined display mode (here, stage A, regardless of the effect state (stage etc.) before the power is shut off or the decorative design stop symbol is used. , The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are both “331”), and it is easy for the player, the game shop staff, and the like to understand that the RAM clear has been performed.

  In addition, "3 (penguin), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)" which is the default display of the first decorative pattern when the RAM is cleared may be a display mode which can be displayed only when the RAM is cleared, or during a normal game. However, for example, it may be configured to be displayed as a premier effect that is almost a big hit confirmation. In addition, the display mode at the time of RAM clear is set to the same display mode as the default display mode at the time of power-off recovery (the display mode similar to (C) of FIG. 137), and at the time of RAM clear, the first decorative symbol is “2 ( Ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe) ”, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed as a numeral“ 246 ”.

  Next, using FIG. 139, the reach voice (reminder that suggests the degree of expectation by the sound generated when the reach is established) and the pseudo-relation pattern, which is the reach effect, are displayed (probability of re-variation). The relationship will be described. The expectation of hitting the reach voice is reach <chance <development <super hot. Further, it should be supplemented in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-fluctuation due to the reach voice when the reach is established, in the variation that develops to a predetermined SP reach after the reach is established. First, (A) will be described. First, in the state where there are three holds, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "reach" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT" which is a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the approximate center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to high. Next, (B) will be described. First, in the state where there are three holds, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT" which is a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the approximate center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo continuous). As described above, when the reach voice of “chance” is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to medium. Next, (C) will be described. First, in the state where there are three holds, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of “development” is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT" which is a pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but is developed into super reach effect, and the super reach effect is displayed. As described above, when the reach voice of “development” is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is 0, and the re-direction is not directly re-varied, and the super-reach effect is directly developed. Next, (D) will be described. First, in the state where there are three holds, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "Gekiatsu" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT" which is a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the approximate center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "Gekiatsu" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to be low.

  In this way, the more the reach voices with high hit expectation are generated, the lower the re-variation (pseudo-run) probability is, but some reach voices are generated among the reach voices with high hit expectation. In this case (here, the “development” reach voice), the re-variation (pseudo-run) is not generated. It should be noted that, even if some reach voices (for example, reach voices of “development”) among the reach voices with high expectation of hit occur, re-variation (pseudo-relation) is configured to occur. If some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voices) occur, the re-variation probability is set to high (for example, the re-variation probability is higher than at "chance"). May be.

In other words, the expectation of hit by the reach voice is reach <chance <development <super hot, and the probability of re-variation (pseudo-run) by the reach voice is
(1) Development (including non-occurrence) <Geki Atsu <Chance <Reach (2) Geki Atsu <Chance <Development <Reach.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a display mode of the decorative pattern in the full rotation effect will be described. First, in the state where there are three holds, the fluctuation stop state is set. Next, fluctuations have begun and reach has been reached. Next, the characters "whole rotation" are displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device SG, and in the left row, middle row, and right row of the first decorative symbol, the symbols are aligned (for example, "777" or "888"). Etc.), the scroll display is performed at a lower speed than a normal fluctuation (for example, the state of the second figure). As described above, the first decorative symbol can be scroll-displayed in the state where the symbols are aligned, but the first decorative symbol is the second decorative symbol even when the symbol is scroll-displayed in the state in which the symbols are aligned. Is displayed individually in the left column, the middle column, and the right column in a state where the symbols are not aligned, and does not become a low speed (= maintains a constant speed). Next, almost simultaneously with the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which the symbols are aligned with only numbers. The second decorative symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned (for example, “777”, “888”, etc.) so as to be synchronized with the first decorative symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, a variation mode of the decorative design for each stage will be described. First, the stage A will be described. In stage A, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scrolling manner by moving the display area of the effect display device SG from top to bottom, and the second decorative pattern is displayed on the spot (second In the decorative pattern display area), the variable display is performed by scrolling the display as if moving from top to bottom. Next, the stage B will be described. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative symbol is horizontally rotated on the spot and the variable symbol is changed, and the second decorative symbol is the same as the stage A (the second symbol). In the decorative pattern display area), the variable display is performed by scrolling the display as if moving from top to bottom. In this way, the first decorative symbol is a symbol that the player can easily recognize, so that the player does not get tired by changing the variation mode depending on the stage, and the second decorative symbol is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since it is a design, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the details of the display content of the decorative pattern during the change will be described. First, (A) will be described. (A) is a figure regarding the display of the 1st decorative design and the 2nd decorative design in the variation pattern used as reach. First, the fluctuation is stopped at stage B. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right design rows of the first decorative design, the design is changing in a variation mode in which the design is changed by horizontally rotating and the second decorative design is changed. In each of the symbol columns of the left column, the middle column, and the right column, the pattern fluctuates in a vertical scrolling mode on the spot. In each symbol row of the first decorative symbol, the symbols are changed in a regular order, such as “1 → 2 → 3 → ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...”, and in the second decorative symbol, Even if the variation of the first decorative symbol is any variation, a predetermined symbol variation is uniformly performed, and “275” → “864” → “387” → “641” → “728” → “413”. → "156" → "532" → "275" → ... In this order, scroll display is performed and symbols are switched. Next, at the timing when the reach is established with "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the timing when the changing "6" is located in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). , "275" is located in the sub area of the changing second decorative pattern, and thus the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern at the predetermined timing when the reach is established is different. Moreover, in the second decorative design, the designs in the left column and the right column are different, and reach is not established.

  Next, (B) will be described. (B) is a figure regarding the display of the 1st decorative design and the 2nd decorative design in the change pattern which becomes a loss without reaching. First, the fluctuation is stopped at stage B. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right design rows of the first decorative design, the design is changing horizontally and the design is changed (high-speed fluctuation). 2 In each of the left, middle, and right design columns of the decorative design, the pattern fluctuates in the manner of vertical scrolling on the spot. Next, at the timing immediately before the stop of the left row, the left row of the first decorative pattern is changing slowly, the state where "8" is displayed, the middle row and the right row are changing rapidly, At this time (for a moment), "868" is displayed (however, the right symbol is not reach because it is changing at high speed). The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed (the second decorative pattern changes only at a normal speed. It may be configured to change at a low speed in the case of full rotation effect), at this time (instantaneous. However, "864" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the left row, the left row of the first decorative pattern is stopped (temporary stop), the middle row of the first decorative pattern, the right row is changing rapidly, at this time (in a moment However, "168" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at the normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "387" is displayed. Next, at the timing immediately before the stop in the right column, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative pattern, and "5" is displayed in the right column during low speed fluctuation. Yes, the middle row is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "165" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at the normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, at the stop timing of the right design, "1" is stopped (temporary stop) in the left column of the first decorative symbol, and "6" is stopped (temporary stop) in the right column of the first decorative symbol. The middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (for a moment), "166" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at the normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "728" is displayed. Next, at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time, "1" is stopped (temporary stop) in the left column of the first decorative symbol, and "6" is stopped (temporary stop) in the right column, The middle row is in a state of low speed fluctuation, and is a state where "116" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at the normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, at the timing when the variation time ends, the variation stop command indicating the end of the variation time is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S (also for stopping the variation display of the decorative pattern), Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variable stop (decision stop) at "126".

  In the first decorative pattern, from immediately before the stop (temporary stop) to the stop (temporary stop) in the left and right columns, or immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop), The symbols are changed in the sequence arranged in advance in advance and become variable stop (fixed stop), but in the second decorative symbol, from just before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop), the change The design displayed immediately before the stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stopped design in an instant and the variable stop (fixed stop) is set. In this example, in the first decorative pattern, the left column is changed to “8 → 1” from immediately before the stop (temporary stop) in the left column to the stop (temporary stop) in the left column, and the stop (right) in the right column ( From the time immediately before the temporary stop) to the stop in the right column (temporary stop), the right column is changed to "5 → 6", and from the time immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop), The column has been changed to "1 → 2". In the second decorative pattern, since it is changing at the normal speed continuously until the fluctuation stop, the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stop symbol "126" in an instant. , The left column is changed to “3 → 1”, the middle column is changed to “6 → 2”, and the right column is changed to “2 → 6”. However, during the change of the second decorative symbol, the symbols are displayed at random, so that the symbol displayed immediately before the variation stop (decision stop) and the final stop symbol may accidentally continue.

  Further, the pattern arrangement pattern of the second decorative pattern may be regular and continuous, for example, “1 → 2 → 3 → ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ → 7 → 8 → 1 → ... As in the first decorative pattern. . ”May be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed differently. Specifically, if the specifications are displayed with one deviation, the left column starts with "1" and "1 → 2 → 3 → ...", and the middle column starts with "2" and "2 → 3 → 4". → ... ", the right column starts from" 3 "and is changed to" 3 → 4 → 5 → ... ", and is changed to the final stop symbol at the time of variable stop (fixed stop).

  Thus, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol (final stop symbol) displayed at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop) are continuous or continuous. Often, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol (final stop symbol) displayed at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop) are not continuous or not continuous. Is increasing.

  Next, the pseudo-relational pattern, the development symbol, and the relationship between the pseudo-relational symbol and the development symbol will be described. In the following description, the configuration that displays the first decorative pattern, the first hold display, etc. during the super reach, etc., but as described above, the first decorative pattern, the first hold display, etc. are displayed during the super reach, etc. You may employ the structure which is not displayed.

  Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing a display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the re-changing is executed. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". The first decorative design is composed of characters and numerical designs, and the second decorative design is composed of only numerical designs. Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both start symbol variation. Next, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both form a reach by displaying "6" on the left symbol and the right symbol, and further, in the first decorative symbol display area (main area), re-changing (for example, , A semi-transparent "NEXT" design ("re-variation suggestion design", "pseudo-relation suggestion design (pseudo-relation suggestion production)") indicating whether or not to be executed is performed from the top of the liquid crystal screen to the bottom. It is moved and displayed. Next, when re-changing is executed, a non-transparent “NEXT” symbol (also referred to as “re-fluctuation symbol” “pseudo continuous symbol”) is displayed in the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen instead of the semi-transparent “NEXT” symbol. Is displayed. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display area (sub area), the symbol suggesting the re-variation is not displayed. In the first decorative symbol display area, after the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both start symbol fluctuation again (before the symbol fluctuation starts again). 1 The stop status of the decorative design is also called "temporary stop". At this time, since the number of reservations remains three, it can be seen that, in one symbol variation, it looks as if the symbol varies a plurality of times. Next, in the symbol variation performed again, the reach is formed again by "7" by the left symbol and the right symbol, and after that, the super reach effect is executed, and since the variation is a loss, the first decorative symbol, the second The decorative patterns are both fixed and not stopped at the reach loss pattern (“717”). During the super reach effect, the battle effect of the ally character and the enemy character is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen, so that even the first decorative symbol, only the numerical symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen ( "Display mode at the time of evacuation"), the player is made to pay attention to the battle effect, and after the battle effect is displayed with the decorative pattern composed of the character and the numerical pattern as at the time of starting the change. It should be noted that the pseudo-relational suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the middle symbol column (substantially the center of the effect display device SG), the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) without scrolling. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-relation) is performed, and in this case, the pseudo-relational pattern is scrolled and displayed so as to be displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (substantially the center of the effect display device SG). You may.

  Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed and becomes a super reach effect. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both start symbol variation. Next, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both form a reach by displaying "6" on the left symbol and the right symbol, and further, in the first decorative symbol display area, it is possible to develop into a super reach effect. After the display of “development” or “development !!” which is the specific symbol (also referred to as development symbol) to be displayed, the super reach production is executed. It should be noted that, when the specific symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area, the symbol indicating the development to the super reach effect is not displayed in the second decorative symbol display area. Further, although “development” and “development !!” are different symbols, the super-reach effect which is the same development destination can be executed regardless of which is displayed. Furthermore, the expectation of winning is different between "development" and "development !!", and when "development !!" is displayed, it is expected to be a big hit than when "development" is displayed. The degree is getting higher. It should be noted that there are multiple types of super-reach effects, for example, a configuration in which different characters have different super-reach effects and different expectations for winning, or super-reach effects are configured in multiple stages, such as the first half of super-reach and the second half of super-reach. However, as a development pattern for super reach reach, not only the pattern that becomes the second half of the super reach via the first half of the reach, but also the pattern that the second half of the reach is displayed without going through the first half of the reach. Good. Therefore, when "development" or "development !!" is displayed, for example, it is sufficient if both are configured to be able to display the super reach production A (character A). At this time, the super reach production A Can be configured to have different jackpot expectations (“development” → super reach production A and “development !!” → super reach production A have different jackpot expectations). In addition, in the case where the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are configured, the case where "development" is displayed and the case where "development !!" is displayed and the same first half of super reach is displayed However, it is also possible to configure so that the ratio of the second half of the super reach is different. Of course, depending on the type of development symbol (“development”, “development !!”, etc.), the possibility of developing into a super-reach with a high jackpot expectation among a plurality of types of super-reach may be configured differently. In addition, a low-anticipation super-reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super-reach production by Kirin described later) and a high-expectancy super-reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, a battle production that is a super-reach production) ) May be provided in plurality.

  Although it is a supplement, here, the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element (for example, a number) and the third element (for example, a character) at the start of fluctuation, at the time of fluctuation stop, and before the super reach is developed. However, in a specific situation (for example, during super reach, while moving a character, during probable change promotion, while displaying an error screen. Here is super reach.) Under the specific circumstances that occur depending on the effect pattern, only the first element (number) is used. It is configured.

  Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a developed pattern is displayed corresponding to the notice type and the super reach effect is achieved. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Here, notice display during pattern change (“Comment notice” that indicates the jackpot expectation degree in characters in an elliptical frame, “Timer that displays until the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree is displayed” "Preliminary notice" and "Next notice" indicating that the change will result in super-reach. First, when "chance" which is "comment notice" is displayed, "development" which is a specific symbol indicating that the super-reach effect is developed next is displayed, and the super-reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "00: 10:00" which is a "timer notice" (display indicating that some effect will occur after 10 seconds) is displayed, it is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed. After "Development !!!" is displayed, the super reach production is executed. On the other hand, when "Next SP Reach" which is the "next notice" is displayed, the specific symbol is not displayed and the super reach effect is executed. In this way, “development” is displayed after “comment notice”, “development !!” is displayed after “timer notice”, and specific symbols are not displayed after “next notice”. Has been done. In addition, here, it is assumed that “development” is displayed after “comment notice” and “development !!” is displayed after “timer notice”, but the correspondence is not limited to this. In this case, "development !!" is displayed after "comment notice" and "development" is displayed after "timer notice", and "development !!!" is displayed after "comment notice". The percentage of "development !!" displayed after "timer notice" may be higher than that of "timer notice", or "comment notice" rather than "development" displayed after "timer notice". The percentage of "development" displayed after may be high. In addition, there is a difference in the jackpot expectation between "development" and "development !!!" (big hit expectation: development <development !!!), and also "comment notice", "timer notice" and "next notice" There is also a difference in the big hit expectation, and the big hit expectation is comment notice <timer notice <next notice.

  Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition at the time of a super reach effect when different display modes of the same notice type are displayed. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Here, the notice display {“Comment notice” (let's both “Chance” and “Glamorous heat !!” is notice notice) that indicates the expectation of jackpot in a letter in an elliptical frame) is displayed while the symbol is changing. Be seen. First, when "chance" is displayed, "development", which is a specific symbol indicating that development to super reach production is next, is displayed, and super reach production is executed. On the other hand, in the case where “intense heat !!” is displayed, after “development !!”, which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach production is developed, the super reach production is executed. In this way, the correspondence is made such that “development” is displayed after “chance” and “development !!!” is displayed after “intense heat !!”. In addition, here, it is assumed that “development” is displayed after “chance”, and “development !!” is displayed after “exciting heat !!”. Not limited, "Development !!!" can be displayed after "Chance", "Development" can be displayed after "Exciting !!", and "Development !!!" is displayed after "Chance". The rate at which "development !!" is displayed after "intense heat !!" may be higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed after "intense heat !!". The rate at which “development” is displayed after “chance” may be higher than that. As described above, just as there is a difference in the degree of expectation for jackpots between "development" and "development !!" "!" Has a higher expectation of a big hit than "chance".

  Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different look-ahead effects are performed and become super reach effects. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, the first hold display changes to blue and the decorative design is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold (holding that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect. Here, the blue hold display.), “Development” is displayed and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when a continuous combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop (“123” in this case), which is a chance eye look-ahead, occurs, “development !!” is displayed in the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold. A super reach effect (not shown) is executed. When the chance eye look-ahead occurs, a special effect occurs around the fixed first decorative pattern, making it easier to recognize that the chance eye look-ahead has occurred, and with respect to the second decorative pattern, the special effect occurs. It may be configured not to do so. In this way, the correspondence is made such that "development" is displayed after the pending change effect is displayed as the prefetch effect, and "development !!" is displayed after the chance eye is displayed as the prefetch effect. There is. In addition, here, it is assumed that “development” is displayed after the pending change effect, and “development !!” is displayed after the chance prefetch, but the invention is not limited to this. "Development !!!" is displayed after the pending change performance, and "Development !!!" is displayed after the chance prefetch, rather than "Development !!!" is displayed after the pending change performance. May be higher, and in this case, “development” may be displayed after the chance prefetching, and “progress” may be displayed after the chance prefetching rather than “progress” after the chance change prefetching. The rate at which "development" is displayed may be high. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in the jackpot expectation between "development" and "development !!!", there is also a difference in the jackpot expectation between the hold change production and the chance look-ahead. The jackpot expectation is getting higher. In this example, the explanation has been given by using the correspondence relationship between the pending change effect and the development pattern (“development” “development !! Of course, it is also applicable to the "angel zone" and the "true angel zone", which are background change effects. In addition, in this example, the description has been made by using the difference in the jackpot expectation degree in one prefetch effect (holding change effect or chance eye prefetching), but whether or not a plurality of types of prefetching effects are simultaneously executed or executed simultaneously. It may be configured such that the correspondence relationship with the development symbol (“development” “development !!”) varies depending on the number of prefetching effects (composite number of prefetching effects). For example, when the pending change effect and the chance eye look-ahead (two kinds of pre-reading effect) are executed more than the case where only the pending change effect (one kind of pre-reading effect) is executed, the development pattern in the trigger change Is easily displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is being executed, the pending change effect and the chance eye prefetch (prefetch effect is 2 (Development !!) may be configured to be displayed at a higher rate when “type” is being executed. In this case, the pending change effect and the chance eye look-ahead (two kinds of look-ahead effects are provided). ) Is displayed when "development" is displayed even if the "development" is displayed when the pending change effect only (one type of prefetch effect) is executed. Good. Further, similar to the developed pattern, the pseudo-relational pattern also has a pseudo-relational pattern (“NEXT”) depending on whether or not a plurality of types of pre-reading effects were simultaneously executed or the number of pre-reading effects (composite number of pre-reading effects) being executed simultaneously. It may be configured to have a different correspondence relationship with "NEXT !!!!!"). For example, when the hold change effect and the chance eye look-ahead (two kinds of look-ahead effects) are executed, the pseudo-interaction is more likely to occur in the trigger variation than when only the hold change effect (one kind of a look-ahead effect) is executed. The pattern is easily displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is being executed, the pending change effect and the chance eye prefetch (prefetch effect is It may be configured such that the ratio of "NEXT !!" is displayed when two types) are being executed, and in this case, the pending change effect and the chance eye look-ahead (the look-ahead effect is 2 "NEXT" is displayed when the "type" is being executed, the rate at which "NEXT" is displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is being executed is higher than the rate at which the "NEXT" is displayed. It may be.

  Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same prefetching effect type are performed and a super reach effect is obtained. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Here, by newly entering the first main game starting opening A10 during the symbol change and winning the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning (the holding is also referred to as "trigger holding"), a new holding display ("trigger holding" (Also referred to as “display”) is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the pending change effect that is one of the prefetch effects). Next, when the trigger hold display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger hold display changes from blue to red, "development !!" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, the correspondence is made such that “development” is displayed after the blue color is displayed in the hold change effect, and “development !!” is displayed after the red color is displayed in the hold change effect. . In addition, here, it is assumed that the correspondence is made such that “development” is displayed after blue and “development !!” is displayed after red, but it is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. "Development !!" may be displayed, and the ratio of "Development !!!" displayed after red may be higher than the ratio of "Development !!!" displayed after blue. In this case In some cases, "development" may be displayed after red, and the percentage of "development" displayed after blue may be higher than the percentage of "development" displayed after red. There is a difference in jackpot expectation between blue and red, which are display modes of the hold change effect, and red has a higher jackpot expectation than blue. In this example, the explanation has been made by using the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the development pattern (“development” “development !! For example, the present invention can be applied to "angel zone" and "true angel zone", which are background change effects.

  Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing to the same super reach effect through different displays. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, after a specific symbol "development" or "development !!" that indicates that the super-reach production is developed, the low-anticipation super-reach production (the first half of the super-reach) where the jackpot expectation is relatively low ), The effect that the giraffe destroys the middle symbol is executed, and the reach-missing symbol combination (“656”) is displayed in the low expectation super reach effect. In the low-expectancy super reach, the first decorative symbol is displayed only as the numerical symbol, but it may be the first decorative symbol composed of the numerical symbol and the character symbol. Next, a high-expectation super-reach effect (second half of super-reach) with a relatively high jackpot expectation is being executed. Here, it is shown that even if either "development" or "development !!" is displayed, it is possible to develop into a super reach production, but "development" and "development !!" !! ”, the rate of development to the high-expectation super reach production is different, and when“ Development ”is displayed, the high-expectation super reach production is executed at a rate of 10%, and“ development !! Is displayed, the high expectation super reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%. Note that 90% of the cases where "Development" is displayed and 50% when "Development !!!" are displayed develop into another high-expectation super reach production not shown, or high-expectation supermarket. It will return to the normal screen without developing to reach production.

  Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing to a super reach effect via a button effect. First, the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) is changing. Next, the decorative design forms a reach, and a button effect that allows the player to operate the sub input button SB is executed. At the time of the button effect, the first decorative symbol is only numbers, the left symbol is displayed on the left edge of the liquid crystal screen, the right symbol is displayed on the right edge of the liquid crystal screen, and a plurality of symbols that can be selected by operating the player sub-input button SB are displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen. The design is displayed in a circle. The plurality of symbols include “6” which is a winning symbol, “development” and “development” which indicates that it is a super reach production, “5” which is a lost symbol, and “NEXT” which is a pseudo symbol. It is displayed. When a plurality of symbols rotate in a circle and the sub input button SB can be operated, a button image described as "PUSH" is displayed in the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen, and the sub input button SB is operated. As a result, one symbol is displayed. Here, a predetermined “development” is displayed, and thereafter, although not shown, a super reach effect is executed. When the sub input button SB is not operated, "development" is displayed after the effective period of the sub input button SB has elapsed, and the super reach effect is executed. The symbol displayed when the operation of the sub input button SB is performed is determined in advance by the preliminary lottery of the sub control board S performed at the start of variation.

The effect in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before developing to the super reach effect (= up to the stage where the developed design shown in the figure is displayed), the first decorative design is not displayed only with the numeric design, but is composed of the numeric design and the character design. The first decorative design may be displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red, iridescent, etc.), the proportion of symbols to be stopped may be different. For example, large button image When is displayed, the proportion of the symbols other than the lost symbols such as “NEXT”, “development”, “development !!”, and winning symbols is displayed is higher than that when the small button image is displayed. May be.
(3) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red, iridescent, etc.), the proportion of the developed pattern or the pseudo continuous symbol displayed may be different. , For example, when a large button image is displayed, a development symbol is displayed at a higher rate than when a small button image is displayed, and “development !!” is displayed at a higher rate. It is also possible to set a high display rate of symbols, a high display rate of “NEXT !!!!!”, and the like.
(4) One of the images may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. Also, a configuration in which a pattern in which a button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which an effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button) are provided. Well, in this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or a pattern other than the lost pattern (“NEXT”, “Development”, “development !!”, winning symbol, etc.) may be displayed at a higher rate. Furthermore, even if the ratio of the development pattern to be displayed is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, in the pattern in which the button image is displayed, May increase the rate at which "Development !!" is displayed.)
(5) The pseudo-relational pattern may be provided not only in “NEXT” but also in plural types such as “NEXT !!”, and in the case of having plural types, “NEXT !!” rather than “NEXT”! "!" May be configured to have a higher jackpot expectation, and "NEXT !!" may be displayed in an array pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle, and further, "NEXT" is displayed. An array pattern in which “NEXT !!!!!” is displayed at the same time may be provided.
(6) A plurality of types of array patterns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle may be provided, and in the case of having a plurality of types, a variation with a high jackpot expectation is high (for example, a jackpot variation or super reach production). (Variation, etc.), even if it is configured so that the array pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree is displayed at a higher rate than when the jackpot expectation degree is low (for example, loss variation without reach). Good. For example, as an array pattern with a high expectation for a big hit, an array pattern without a missing pattern (for example, an array pattern displayed as "6 (big hit pattern) / development / development / NEXT / development !!") or "development" Sequence pattern that does not have "," but "development !!" is displayed (for example, "6 ・ development !! ・ 5 ・ NEXT ・ development !!!", "6 ・ development !!! ・ development !!!・ An array pattern such as "Development !!" is displayed).

  As in (3), it is configured such that the proportion of the development symbol displayed is different according to the display mode of the advance notice of the change (button effect, comment advance notice, timer advance notice, etc.), or the change advance notice display mode is changed. By configuring so that the pseudo-relational symbols are displayed in different proportions, if the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation is high expectation, it is highly possible that the developed symbols or the pseudo-relational symbols are displayed, and the player Can be configured so that it is easy to grasp the jackpot expectation.

  Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach production is performed in different production stages (also referred to as production modes). First, the performance stage A will be described in detail. On the production stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, after forming a reach and displaying "development" which is a specific symbol indicating that the reach is developed, the super reach effect is executed. Next, the performance stage B will be described in detail. On the production stage B, the first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, after the reach is formed, the super reach production is executed as it is (that is, the "development" which is a specific symbol indicating that the development to the super reach production is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the production stage After displaying "development (a mode in which the inside of the kanji is hollowed out as shown in the figure)" different from A, the super reach effect is executed. That is, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative design differs depending on the performance stage, but the display mode of the second decorative design does not differ (similar), and the first decoration depends on the production stage. Although the developed design can be displayed in the design, the developed design is not displayed in the second decorative design.

  Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-changing is executed in a different effect stage. First, the performance stage A will be described in detail. On the production stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, the reach is formed, and after the "NEXT" symbol indicating that the re-variation is executed is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. Next, the performance stage B will be described in detail. On the production stage B, the first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, after "678" (first order), which is a symbol combination indicating that re-variation is executed in the first decorative symbol, is displayed (temporarily stopped), the symbol variation is started again, or the reach is reached. When the symbol is formed, after the "NEXT (a form in which the inside of the alphabet as shown in the figure is cut out)" symbol different from the stage A is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. If the re-variation is performed twice depending on which production stage the re-variation is performed, {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop at reach loss) → SP reach development (re-change) (Variation)}, and when the re-variation is executed three times {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation)} The difference from the jackpot expectation degree may be different. For example, in the production stage A (for example, a daytime stage or a non-lookahead stage other than the angel zone), the jackpot expectation when the re-variation is performed twice is 5% on average, and the re-variation is performed three times. The average jackpot expectation is 25%, and the difference is 20% (5 times the difference), but it changes again in the stage B (for example, the night stage or the look-ahead stage such as the angel zone). The average jackpot expectation when executing 2 times is 40%, the jackpot expectation when re-changing is performed 3 times is 50%, and the difference is 10% (1.25 times difference). ). The difference in the jackpot expectation (special game execution expectation) is, for example, one obtained by subtracting in percent display, one obtained by dividing the jackpot expectation (1 / N), and the like. Further, although the display mode of the first decorative design is different depending on the production stage (production stage A, production stage B), the display mode of the second decorative design is the same, and the "NEXT" design is the first decorative design. Although it may be displayed, the "NEXT" symbol may not be displayed for the second decorative symbol. It should be noted that both the production stage A and the production stage B are mainly explained as the non-prefetch stage in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (the game state similar to the daytime stage described above), but not limited to this. , Production stage A non-probability stage in the non-stochastic variation game state and non-time reduction game state (for example, the above-mentioned day stage), production stage B pre-fetch stage in the non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state (eg, Both the production stage A and the production stage B, which are configured as the night stage described above, are configured as the prefetch stage in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the production stage A and the production stage B are both the probability variation game state and It is also possible to configure as a non-look-ahead stage in a time-saving game state There, it is possible to apply the effect mode shown in this example regardless if gaming state, etc. only to include a plurality of presentation stages.

  Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the pseudo continuous symbol and the specific symbol are displayed and the super reach effect is executed. First, the decorative design (first decorative design, second decorative design) is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, a reach is formed, and a semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol that is a re-variation suggesting symbol that suggests that the re-variation is executed is displayed. When the semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol is moved and displayed from the upper part to the lower part of the liquid crystal screen and re-variation is executed, after the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. The symbol is changed again, the reach is formed again, and this time, not the pseudo continuous symbol, but “development” indicating that the super reach effect is executed is displayed. After that, the super reach effect is executed, and since the variation is a loss, the reach stop symbol (“717”) is fixedly stopped. As shown in this figure, it is possible to display a specific symbol (for example, “development”) after displaying the pseudo symbol (for example, “NEXT”), while displaying the pseudo symbol after displaying the specific symbol. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed. In addition, whether or not the pseudo symbol is displayed (= whether or not the re-variation is executed), the display number of the pseudo-relational symbol (= the number of times of re-variation), and the like, the ratio of displaying the specific symbol May be different. For example, the larger the number of re-variations, the more easily the specific symbol is displayed (= the higher the ratio of displaying the specific symbol without displaying the lost symbols). Even if the specific symbol is displayed, it may be configured so that the rate of displaying “development !!

  As shown in FIG. 154, even when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (when displaying the pseudo continuous symbol and when displaying the developed symbol), the second decorative symbol is in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. The variable display is continued in all, and further, even during the super reach, the variable display may be continued in the left column, the middle column, and the right column.

  Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "861", but the left symbol (elephant) and the middle symbol (giraffe), the middle symbol (giraffe) and the right symbol (chick) are displayed in an overlapping manner. At this time, the middle symbol (giraffe) is arranged behind the left symbol (elephant) and the right symbol (chick) on the liquid crystal screen behind (the player side is in front), and partly by the left symbol (elephant) and the right symbol (chick). It is hidden. Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts symbol variation. Next, the reach is formed, and the middle symbol becomes a low-speed variable display. At this time, the middle symbol is arranged in front of the liquid crystal screen with respect to the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. In this figure, the chick ("1") is displayed as a middle pattern at a low speed and does not stop, and then the pseudo continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) is displayed at a low speed and stopped at the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after the re-variation (pseudo continuous variation) is executed, the super-reach effect is executed, and since the variation is a loss, it is definitely stopped at the reach loss symbol (“717”). When displaying the reach lost design, the middle pattern (chick) is placed behind the left design (lion) and the right design (lion) on the LCD screen, as before the fluctuation starts, and a part of the middle design (chick) Is hidden. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not overlapped at any timing. Even if a development symbol (“development” or “development !!!”) is displayed instead of the pseudo symbol, the relation between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol is displayed as the pseudo symbol. It can be the same as in the case of. The display mode may be a display mode on the stage C or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high expectation of hit). That is, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed on the stage A or the stage B, but may be a display mode that can be displayed on the stage C. Ordinary fluctuations (comparison of stopping with a loss without reach) It may be a display mode in which a particular variation (variation with high expectation of hitting the reach) may be displayed instead of (variation in a relatively short time).

  Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing a transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both start symbol variation. At this time, the first decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from low speed to become high-speed symbol fluctuation (low speed → medium speed → high speed). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol has a constant symbol variation speed, and is always a high-speed symbol variation. Next, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern become high speed, and when the reach is formed by the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the middle pattern becomes a slow symbol fluctuation in the first decorative pattern, In the two decorative symbols, the middle symbol is a high-speed symbol fluctuation. After that, while the super reach production is being executed, the left design and the right design in which the first decorative design and the second decorative design together form the reach are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle design is at high speed. The design is changing. After the end of the super reach production, the change was lost, so it is definitely stopped at the reach lost design (“686”). In the figure, during execution of the super reach effect, only the middle symbol is changed while the reach is formed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the invention is not limited to this and execution of the super reach effect is performed. During execution of the middle or a specific super reach effect, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be changed. It should be noted that the second decorative design may also be provided with a plurality of fluctuation speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative design is less likely to change the fluctuation speed than the first decorative design. For example, the low speed is not used in the second decorative design but the medium speed is used (the first decorative design uses low speed, medium speed and high speed). In addition, the second decorative pattern can be configured not to be temporarily stopped on the way, specifically, a configuration that is always high speed or stopped (fixed stop), or high speed, medium speed, and stopped (fixed stop). And the like.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the pseudo-relational symbol and the developed symbol in the time shortening game state. In the time-saving game state, it may be configured to be able to display the pseudo-relational pattern or the development symbol, but it is more preferable to be configured not to be able to display the pseudo-relational symbol or the development symbol. Because, in the time shortening game state, the variation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time shortening game state), and there are less effects that suggest a big hit within one variation. When displaying a pseudo-relational pattern or a developed pattern, it means that the one with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, so the big hit period (the period from the end of one big hit to the start of the next big hit) is extended. The rate at which the number of balls thrown out increases during the condominium slows down. Further, in this way, in the time-saving game state, the short variation time is easily selected and the amount of presentation is small, so the variation mode of the first decorative symbol itself or the first decorative symbol may be simple, and the first element It is preferable to be composed of only (numerals).

  As a supplementary note, in the sixth embodiment, an example in which the second decorative design is always displayed during variable display and is definitely fixed is stopped, but as described above, the first decorative design is visually recognized in the second decorative design. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize, and in this case, the second decorative symbol is not necessarily fixedly stopped.

  In FIGS. 143 to 156, the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side have been described as an example, but the first hold display on the second main game side. Also, the second main game side second hold display may be displayed.

  In addition, in FIGS. 143 to 156, the example in which the second decorative pattern is the reach mode is described, but the second decorative pattern may not be the reach mode (it is always changing until the fixed stop). .

  Based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiment is added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first number-of-holds image and the second number-of-holds image,
Pachinko game characterized in that the first display image and the second display image are not displayed in the effect display section in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (10),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
Equipped with
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Even when the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of holdings of the second holding are the same, the first holding image and the second holding image are configured to have different display modes,
The first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured to have different display modes even when the first hold number and the second hold number are the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
In the normal gaming state, while the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of first hold and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of second hold is on the effect display unit. Can be displayed,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first display number image and the second display number image can be displayed on the effect display unit in both the normal game state and the specific game state.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (12),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
Equipped with
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
Performed when the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the number of held images corresponding to the number of holdings that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. An image corresponding to the variation of the identification information is displayed,
In the normal game state, it is possible to display the variation corresponding image when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, while the variation corresponding image is displayed when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. It is a pachinko machine characterized by not doing it.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (13),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the normal game state, the effect display section is configured so that the first effect design and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner.
In the normal game state, the effect display section is configured so that the first effect design and the first hold number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner.
In the effect display unit, the second effect design and the first reserved image are configured not to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect design and the first number-of-holds image are not overlapped and displayed.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (14),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
An operation member that can be operated by the player (for example, cross button SB-2),
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number indicating the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number indicating the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is possible to adjust the volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker based on the operation state of the operation member during the variable display stop or the variable display.
When the volume level can be adjusted, the volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The volume adjustment image, the first effect design, and the second effect design can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol, and the display priority of the second effect symbol is configured to be higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol,
The volume adjustment image, the first hold image or the second hold image, the first hold number image or the second hold number image, can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first hold image or the second hold image, and the display priority of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is the first hold image or the second hold image. It is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect design can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect design can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect design do not overlap,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the volume adjustment image and the second effect design do not overlap even during variable display.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (15),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
When the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop display, it is configured not to start a new change display over a predetermined change display stop time,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is possible to execute a hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number when there is a new ball entering the first starting opening,
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number when there is a new ball entering the second starting opening,
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is shorter than the hold image generation effect time, and is configured to be shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (16),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first hold image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect design in the change display of the first hold image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first hold image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the special display mode is more likely to be the special display mode than the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
The variable display time of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first number-of-holds image when the first number-of-holds image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of variable display is the first number-of-holds immediately before the start of variable display. When the image is in a specific display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first held number image,
The probability that the specific display mode is the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in the predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of being the specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the first reserved number image is the specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability that the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in the predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display. Just before the start, when the first number-of-holds image is a specific display mode, it is the same as the probability of being the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first number-of-holds image. It is a pachinko machine featuring.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (17),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
In the normal game state, the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect design that can be displayed after the special display mode has been set as the display mode.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (18),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Equipped with
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is possible to execute a hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed,
It is possible to execute a first update display as a display update of the first held number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting opening.
It is possible to execute the first update display as a display update of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting opening.
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as the display update of the first hold number image or the second hold number image,
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the held image movement effect is started during the execution of the held image generation effect, the held image generation effect and the held image movement effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the holding image generation effect being executed, and When the execution of the held image generation effect is started during the execution of the held image movement effect, the held image movement effect and the held image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the holding image movement effect being executed,
When a new variable display is started during execution of the first update display of the first number-of-holds image or the second number-of-holds image, the first update display of the first-number-of-holds image or the second number-of-holds image is displayed. After the execution is finished, execute the second update display of the first number of held images or the second number of held images,
When a new ball enters the first starting opening or the second starting opening during execution of the second update display of the first holding number image or the second holding number image, the first holding number image or A pachinko gaming machine characterized by executing the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image after the execution of the second update display of the second hold number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (19),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the aspect is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo variation that is variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the provisional display aspect of the first effect symbol is displayed, the first effect effect is displayed. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first number-of-holds image and the second number-of-holds image,
Pachinko game characterized in that the first display image and the second display image are not displayed in the effect display section in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (20),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
When the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop display, it is configured not to start a new change display over a predetermined change display stop time,
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
Equipped with
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Even when the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of holdings of the second holding are the same, the first holding image and the second holding image are configured to have different display modes,
Even when the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of holdings of the second holding are the same, the first holding number image and the second holding number image are configured to have different display modes,
A hold image generation effect can be executed when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting opening,
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting opening,
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is shorter than the hold image generation effect time, and is configured to be shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (21) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
When the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop display, it is configured not to start a new change display over a predetermined change display stop time,
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
Equipped with
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
In the normal gaming state, while the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of first hold and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of second hold is on the effect display unit. Can be displayed,
In either the normal game state or the specific game state, the first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured to be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is possible to execute a hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting opening,
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting opening,
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is shorter than the hold image generation effect time, and is configured to be shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (22),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
As a game area in which the game ball can flow down, it has a first area and a second area different from the first area,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Performed when the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the number of held images corresponding to the number of holdings that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. An image corresponding to the variation of the identification information is displayed,
In the normal game state, it is possible to display the variation corresponding image when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, while the variation corresponding image is displayed when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Is configured not to
It is possible to display a first notification image for notifying that the game ball should be fired toward the first area side on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display a second notification image that notifies that the game ball should be fired toward the second area side on the effect display unit,
When the first hold number image is updated in the specific game state, the second notification image is configured to be displayed,
The second notification image can be displayed overlapping with the first effect design, while the second effect design, the first reserved image, the second reserved image, the first reserved number image, and the second reserved number image. Are configured to not appear duplicated,
Regardless of whether the first hold number image is updated in the specific game state, the image is different from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be shot toward the second area side. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that a special notification image for notifying that can be displayed on the effect display unit.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (23),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the aspect is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo variation that is variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the provisional display aspect of the first effect symbol is displayed, the first effect effect is displayed. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
In the normal game state, the effect display section is configured so that the first effect design and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner.
In the normal game state, the effect display section is configured so that the first effect design and the first hold number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner.
In the effect display unit, the second effect design and the first reserved image are configured not to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect design and the first number-of-holds image are not overlapped and displayed.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (24),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
An operation member that can be operated by the player (for example, cross button SB-2),
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). Second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
Equipped with
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is possible to adjust the volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker based on the operation state of the operation member during the variable display stop or the variable display.
When the volume level can be adjusted, the volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The volume adjustment image, the first effect design, and the second effect design can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol, and the display priority of the second effect symbol is configured to be higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol,
The volume adjustment image, the first hold image or the second hold image, the first hold number image or the second hold number image, can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first hold image or the second hold image, and the display priority of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is the first hold image or the second hold image. It is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect design can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect design can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect design do not overlap,
Even during variable display, the volume adjustment image and the second effect design are configured not to overlap,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect design in the normal game state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second effect design in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (25),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop display, it is configured not to start a new change display over a predetermined change display stop time,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
There are multiple types of effect display formats, and it is possible to display any of the multiple types of effect display formats on the effect display section. When displaying the effect display content, the effect display format corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to display what you did,
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold that is the first hold of the remaining first hold is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The hold change effect was executed during the variable display of the first identification information in the situation where the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first hold information remains. In this case, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold may be changed while the display mode of the first hold number image is not changed,
It is possible to execute a hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting opening,
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting opening,
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is shorter than the hold image generation effect time, and is configured to be shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (26),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal game state,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold on the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings on the effect display unit,
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first hold image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect design in the change display of the first hold image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first hold image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the special display mode is more likely to be the special display mode than the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
The variable display time of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first number-of-holds image when the first number-of-holds image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of variable display is the first number-of-holds immediately before the start of variable display. When the image is in a specific display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first held number image,
The probability that the specific display mode is the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in the predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of being the specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the first reserved number image is the specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability that the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in the predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of being a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect design in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect design in the normal game state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second effect design in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (27),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
In the normal game state, the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state. It is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect design that can be displayed after the special display mode is displayed,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes that are dependent upon determining the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The first display mode which is the display mode of the specific first production design corresponding to the first production mode and the second display mode which is the display mode of the specific first production design corresponding to the second production mode are different. It is configured to be a display mode,
In the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first effect mode, the specific first effect symbol in the first display mode can be variably displayed. Is composed of
In the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second effect mode, or the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second effect mode, the specific first effect symbol in the second display mode can be variably displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured in.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (28) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
It is possible to display a number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold, in the first hold image display area in the effect display unit,
It is possible to display a number of second hold images corresponding to the number of remaining second hold, in the second hold image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the hold number of the remaining first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the hold number of the remaining second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
There are multiple types of effect display formats, and it is possible to display any of the multiple types of effect display formats on the effect display section. When displaying the effect display content, the effect display format corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to display what you did,
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold that is the first hold of the remaining first hold is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The hold change effect was executed during the variable display of the first identification information in the situation where the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first hold information remains. In this case, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold may be changed, while the display mode of the first hold number image is configured not to be changed,
It is possible to execute a hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed,
It is possible to execute a first update display as a display update of the first held number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting opening.
It is possible to execute the first update display as a display update of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting opening.
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as the display update of the first hold number image or the second hold number image,
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the held image movement effect is started during the execution of the held image generation effect, the held image generation effect and the held image movement effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the holding image generation effect being executed, and When the execution of the held image generation effect is started during the execution of the held image movement effect, the held image movement effect and the held image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the holding image movement effect being executed,
When a new variable display is started during execution of the first update display of the first number-of-holds image or the second number-of-holds image, the first update display of the first-number-of-holds image or the second number-of-holds image is displayed. After the execution is finished, execute the second update display of the first number of held images or the second number of held images,
When a new ball enters the first starting opening or the second starting opening during execution of the second update display of the first holding number image or the second holding number image, the first holding number image or A pachinko gaming machine characterized by executing the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image after the execution of the second update display of the second hold number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (29),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
As a type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first effect design. It is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the special game is different depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the specific display mode A is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes Of the types of specific display modes, the probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect design will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured differently according to the contents of.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (30) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
As a type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first effect design. It is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the special game is different depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the specific display mode A is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes Among the specific display modes of the types, the probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect design is the look-ahead effect that is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so as to differ depending on whether the type is the pre-reading effect A or the pre-reading effect B.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (31),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects and a case where M (M> N) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. Of the types of pre-reading effects, it is configured such that when M types of pre-reading effects are executed, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the holding, which is the execution timing of the pre-reading effects, is relatively high. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by having.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (32),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
In a situation where there is a specific hold that is a first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the specific hold on the effect display unit,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects and a case where M (M> N) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. It is configured such that, when M types of prefetch effects are executed, among the types of prefetch effects, the probability that the special display mode is displayed is relatively high in the variable display related to the hold, which is the execution timing of the prefetch effects. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (33) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
An operation member that can be operated by the player (for example, cross button SB-2),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the effects,
In the case where the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and in the case where the second operation promotion effect is displayed, The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing at which the two-operation promoting effect is displayed is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (34) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
An operation member that can be operated by the player (for example, cross button SB-2),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the effects,
As a type of operation promotion effect, at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect are included, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, a timing after the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. And the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (35),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
There are multiple types of development effects that are effects that are executed after the reach is established, and there are multiple types of post-reach effects that can occur after the reach is established and before the development effects are executed.
A pachinko characterized by being configured such that the probability that a special display mode is displayed after the post-reach effect has been generated is different depending on which of the multiple types of post-reach effects has occurred. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (36),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes that are dependent upon determining the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
One of the switching display mode of switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode of switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (37),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
As a type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first effect design. It is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the special game is different depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect design, the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of Of the types of specific display modes, the probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect design is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to differ depending on the contents of
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol within a certain one production period, or the special display mode is a temporary display of the first production symbol within a certain one production period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period is different depending on the number of times of display as a mode.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (38) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
As a type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first effect design. It is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the special game is different depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the specific display mode A is selected from the plurality of types of specific display modes as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, or the plural The pre-reading effect that the probability that the specific display mode B is selected as the temporary display mode of the first effect design is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed Is configured differently depending on the type of
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol within a certain one production period, or the special display mode is a temporary display of the first production symbol within a certain one production period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period is different depending on the number of times of display as a mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (39),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects and a case where M (M> N) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. Of the types of pre-reading effects, it is configured such that when M types of pre-reading effects are executed, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the holding, which is the execution timing of the pre-reading effects, is relatively high. And
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol within a certain one production period, or the special display mode is a temporary display of the first production symbol within a certain one production period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period is different depending on the number of times of display as a mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (40),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
There are multiple types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display unit, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the effect display format that has been set,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed when re-changing is executed, or re-changing is executed, depending on which of the plural kinds of effect display formats is set. If the display mode of the special display mode that is displayed is different,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects and a case where M (M> N) types of pre-reading effects are executed among a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. It is configured such that, when M types of prefetch effects are executed, among the types of prefetch effects, the probability that the special display mode is displayed is relatively high in the variable display related to the hold, which is the execution timing of the prefetch effects. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (41),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started in a certain one effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol of the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or the special display mode is a temporary display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. Depending on the number of times displayed as a mode, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period is configured to be different,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the effects,
As a type of operation promotion effect, at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect are included, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, a timing after the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. In, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing when the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (42),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
An operation member that can be operated by the player (for example, cross button SB-2),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
There are multiple types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display unit, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the effect display format that has been set,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed when re-changing is executed, or re-changing is executed, depending on which of the plural kinds of effect display formats is set. If the display mode of the special display mode that is displayed is different,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the effects,
As a type of operation promotion effect, at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect are included, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, a timing after the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. And the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (43) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes that are dependent upon determining the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
Expectation of execution of special game when special display mode is displayed N (N> 0) times in a certain one effect period in the first effect mode and special display mode in a certain one effect period in the first effect mode The difference in the execution expectation of the special game when N is displayed N + 1 times is the execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N> 0) times within a certain effect period in the second effect mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the expectation and the expectation of execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N + 1 times within a certain effect period in the second effect mode,
There are multiple types of development effects that are effects that are executed after the reach is established, and there are multiple types of post-reach effects that can occur after the reach is established and before the development effects are executed.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed after the post-reach effect has occurred, or the probability that the special display mode is displayed, depending on which of the multiple types of post-reach effects has occurred. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (44),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the first random number temporary storage unit (for example, the first random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A),
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, the second random number temporary storage unit (for example, the second random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B),
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is variably displayed and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that is controlled to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
For the first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display may be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation that is again variably displayed within the certain one production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain one effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain one effect period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold on the effect display unit,
As types of prefetching effect, a plurality of types including at least prefetching effect A and prefetching effect B are provided,
When the special display mode is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect design, the special display mode A among the plurality of types of special display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of Among the special display modes of the type, the probability that the special display mode B will be displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect design is the look-ahead effect that is displayed before the special display mode is displayed. Is configured to be different depending on whether the type is the prefetching effect A or the prefetching effect B,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes that are dependent upon determining the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode is switched and displayed, and the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode is switched and displayed are different,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the second effect mode are the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entrance determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game starting mouth entrance judging means MJ11-B 2nd main game starting entrance judging means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C10 1st prize winning entrance judging Means, MJ11-C20 Second prize winning entrance determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 hold control means, MJ31 hold digestion control means MJ31j variation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 symbol hold means MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary Storage means MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol retention Means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN10 winning and drawing lottery means MN11-A first main game winning and drawing lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game winning and drawing lottery table MN11-B second Main game win / loss lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game win / loss lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game win / loss lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win / loss lottery table MN20 Special game transition decision means, MN40 Symbol content decision means MN41-A First main game symbol determining means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determining lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determining means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determining lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 fluctuation mode determination Dan, MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progression means MP10 display control means, MP11-C first / second main game symbol control means MP11t-C first -Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B second main game starting port electric auditors opening and closing control means MP21-B second Main game start opening electric role opening / closing condition determination means, MP22t-B second main game start opening electric role opening timer MP30 special game control hand , MP31 condition determination means MP32 special game content determination means, MP32ta special game content reference table MP33 special game execution means, MP33-C first and second big winning mouth electric auditors opening / closing control means MP33c prize ball counter, MP34 special game time Management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability change end condition determination means, MP52 Time reduction end condition determination means MP52c Time reduction number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage Means, MB11b-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related Information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control hand MT10 command transmission buffer, MH award ball payout determination means A first main game peripheral equipment, A10 first main game start opening A11s first main game start entrance ball detection device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g first Main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game starting port B11s 2nd main game starting port entrance detection device, B11d 2nd main game starting port electric Characteristic B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section, C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device C10 1st big winning a prize, C11s 1st Special winning prize winning detection device C11d 1st special winning prize electric prize, C20 2nd special winning prize C21s 2nd special prize winning prize detecting device, C21d 2nd special prize electric prize H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game starting opening H11s auxiliary game starting opening ball entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game pattern display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative pattern display control means SM21n design drawing display content determining means, SM21ta lottery table SM21ta design content variation determination table SM21ta-2 decorative design effect table, SM21b temporary drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 first external drawing variable time management timer, SM22 external drawing pending information display control means,
SM22b Design drawing hold information temporary storage means, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n background effect display content determination means, SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 advance notice effect display control means, SM24n advance notice effect display content determination means SM24b advance notice effect related information Temporary storage means, SM25 reach production display control means SM25n Reach production display content determination means, SM25b Reach production related information temporary storage means SM27 Right hit display control means SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control section), SS10 Sub information Transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern display area, SG12 first hold display section SG13 second hold display section KH prize ball payout control group Board KE award ball payout device

Claims (1)

A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display section that can display effects,
It is provided with a sub game part that controls the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained first random number as a first hold until the first hit determination permission condition is satisfied,
When the first win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information,
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be variably displayed on the first identification information display part and then stopping the first identification information.
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
When the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained second random number as a second hold until the second hit determination permission condition is satisfied,
When the second win / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the win / fail judgment. A second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be variably displayed on the second identification information display part and then stop the second identification information.
After the result of the win / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the win / fail determination based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous to the player,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
After the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit, first effect symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the first effect symbol on the effect display unit,
After the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit, the second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to variably display the first effect design and the second effect design. Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured so that the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to display the final display mode of the design,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one production period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes that are dependent upon determining the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
One of the switching display mode of switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode of switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. Cage,
When the final display mode of the first effect design is displayed, the final display mode of the first effect design is displayed in each of the plurality of first effect design rows, thereby It is configured to display a combination of final display modes,
When the final display mode of the second effect design is displayed, the final display mode of the second effect design is displayed in each of the plurality of second effect design rows, thereby It is configured to display a combination of final display modes,
The plurality of first effect design rows and the plurality of second effect design rows are the same number of design rows,
Even when the plurality of first effect symbols are variably displayed in a state of being aligned, the plurality of second effect symbols are variably displayed in a state of being incomplete,
When the operation means is operated during the variable display of the first effect design and the second effect design, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed.
When the volume adjustment screen is displayed by the operation of the operation means during the variable display of the first effect design and the second effect design, the first effect design and the volume adjustment screen may overlap. , The second production design and the volume adjustment screen are configured not to overlap ,
The first effect design is configured to have at least a first element and a second element,
The second production design does not have the second element, but is configured to have at least the first element,
The final display mode of the first effect design when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, and the first identification information or the second identification information is in the certain stop display mode. It is possible to display the final display mode of the first effect design after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display by a different mode,
The display mode of the second effect design immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect design displayed in the variable display before the variable display, The display mode of the second effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information, regardless of the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display, It is configured to display a certain type of prescribed display mode among a plurality of predetermined types of prescribed display modes and then switch to a different type of prescribed display mode from the certain type of prescribed display mode. /> A pachinko machine characterized by the following.

Images